JP7440917B2 - gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained when the acquisition condition is met, and a variation effect of the effect symbols is displayed as an image based on the determination result. It is generally executed by a device.

In such a gaming machine, there are multiple types of variation patterns for the variation performance of the performance symbols, and based on the determination result, the user selects from among the multiple types of variation patterns and displays the fluctuation performance of the performance symbols in the selected variation pattern as an image. The information was displayed on a display device (for example, see Patent Document 1).

JP2017-018225A

However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the aspect of the variation presentation of the presentation symbols, which may lead to a decrease in the interest of the game.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-mentioned problems, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

[Application example 1]
In order to solve the above problems, the gaming machine of Application Example 1 of the present application includes a main control board (control board 501) on which a plurality of electronic components (electronic components 595) for controlling the game are mounted, and the main control board a transparent storage section (case section 1700) that houses the game controller, and an information display (1750) provided on the main control board and capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the executed game. , a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the game control means, and a first information identification section (seal section 1710) provided in the storage section and having transparency. and a second information identification section (seal section 1561), and a first information display section (code section 1712, information display section) provided in the first information identification section (seal section 1710) for displaying information regarding the game control means. section 1713) and a second information display section (writing area 1570), and third information provided in the storage section and different from the first information identification section (seal section 1710) and the second information identification section (seal section 1561). an identification section (tamperproof seal section 1730) , the first information identification section (seal section 1710) is arranged so as to overlap at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components contained in the storage section. , and has a plurality of colored regions (colored regions 1575), and in an area between a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, the storage The electronic components of the main control board housed in the section can be visually recognized, and the third information identification section distinguishes between a first predetermined information (code section 1732) including code information and a second predetermined information (code section 1732) including character information. information display section 1731), the first predetermined information can be checked for consistency with the information indicated by the first information display section, and the information display is visible from the outside of the storage section. a plurality of independently displayable display sections (1780a, 1780b) that display a plurality of different information. The first display and the second display are displays associated with each other and are provided at different distances from a predetermined surface of the game control means, and the thickness of the storage section a distance from a virtual plane extending in a direction perpendicular to the direction to the first predetermined information (code section 1732) , and a distance from the virtual plane to the first information display section (code section 1712, information display section 1713). The gist is that the distance to

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that can improve the interest of gaming.

It is a diagram showing an example of a front view of the gaming machine. It is a diagram showing an example of a block diagram of the entire gaming machine. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the main control board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the main control board. It is a figure showing input control processing in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the 1st starting port detection switch input process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows the special figure special electric control process in a main control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the production control board. It is a diagram showing the types of commands sent from the main control board to the production control board. It is a figure which shows the main processing in a production control part. It is a diagram showing timer interrupt processing in the production control section. It is a figure showing icon change production processing in a production control part. It is a figure showing icon change production decision processing in a production control part. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of an icon final display mode determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a change scenario determination table. It is a figure which shows the icon display mode update process in a production control part. It is a figure which shows an example of the change pattern determination table for pending icons. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1 step change pattern determination table for the said icon. It is a figure which shows an example of the two-step change pattern determination table for the said icon. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the frequency of occurrence of the pending icon display mode and the timing of occurrence of a change effect, and (b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 of the frequency of occurrence between the type of change effect and the timing of occurrence of change effect. (c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the frequency of occurrence between the change production type and the change production generation timing, and (d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes). FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing main processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating command reception interrupt processing in the overall control unit. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating V blank interrupt processing in the overall control unit. This is a timing chart 1 of a change performance when winning a prize. This is a timing chart 2 of the change performance when winning a prize. It is a diagram showing an example of a presentation that changes when winning a prize. FIG. 1 is a timing chart 1 of a normal change pattern 01. FIG. FIG. 2 is a timing chart 2 of normal change pattern 01. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing an example of the effect of normal change pattern 01. FIG. It is a timing chart 1 of character action change pattern 01. It is a timing chart 2 of character action change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the character action change pattern 01. 33 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 32. FIG. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 1 of the symbol effect change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the timing chart 2 of the symbol effect change pattern 01. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance of the symbol effect change pattern 01. 37 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 36. FIG. It is a timing chart in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which a variable performance is started from a customer waiting state. 40 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 39. FIG. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance. It is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. It is a diagram showing an example of a performance in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state. 49 is a diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 48. FIG. It is a figure explaining the transition of the display mode when it is displayed in the mode of normal reach in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining the change of the display mode when SP reach effect is performed. It is a figure explaining the change of a display mode when it is displayed in a non-reach mode in a 1st display mode. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of a variation end suggestion effect. It is a figure explaining an example of pseudo continuous performance when displayed in the mode of normal reach in the 1st display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo continuous performance when displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode. It is a figure explaining an example of a revival performance when SP reach performance is executed. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating another example of the variation end suggestion performance. It is a diagram explaining an example of a variation end suggestion performance in a performance pattern 5470a. It is a diagram illustrating a low probability fluctuation pattern table that is a fluctuation pattern table in a low probability gaming state. It is a diagram illustrating a high probability fluctuation pattern table that is a fluctuation pattern table in a high probability gaming state. It is a figure which illustrated the small reservation fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table when the number of reservations is small. It is a figure which illustrated the multiple reservation fluctuation pattern table which is a fluctuation pattern table when there are many reservations. It is a perspective view of the game machine 1P in a state where the outer frame 10, the game board unit 12P, and the inner frame 14P are open. It is a back view of the game board unit 12P. It is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit 12P. They are (a) a perspective view, (b) a rear view, and (c) a right side view of the assembly 2P. It is an exploded perspective view of assembly 2P. It is a left side view showing how the board case 3P is assembled to the pedestal 20P. They are (a) a perspective view, (b) a rear view, and (c) a right side view of the board case 3P. It is an exploded perspective view of board case 3P. They are (a) a back view and (b) a front view of a sealed body 4P that combines an outer case 45P and an inner case 40P. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1003 according to a modification. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1103 according to a modification. FIG. 64 is a cross-sectional view in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to the line AA in FIG. 63 in an outer case 45P of a board case 1203 according to a modification. FIG. FIG. 7 is a rear view of a board case 1303 according to a modification. 70 is a sectional view taken along the line BB in FIG. 69 of the outer case 45P of the board case 1303. FIG. FIG. 15 is a rear view of a board case 1551 according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 when viewed from an angle where the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502. FIG. 17 is a rear view of a board case 1700 housing a control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a seal portion 1710, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of a date mark portion 1720. (a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the tamper-proof seal portion 1730, and (b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the state in which the tamper-proof seal portion 1730 is attached to the board case 1700. 17 is a schematic diagram illustrating a display configuration of an information display 1750. FIG. It is a table explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1P. It is a table explaining the content and display form displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the setting display of the gaming machine 1P. (a) is a sectional view of an identification display section 1791 of a board case 1790 according to a modification, and (b) is a sectional view of an identification display section 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. FIG. 7 is a rear view of a board case 1803 housing a control board 501 according to the sixth embodiment. 5 is a diagram showing a state in which an electronic component 595 is viewed diagonally from above through a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561. FIG. They are (a) a top view and (b) a side view of a transparent socket 1801. 74A to 74D are sectional views (a) to (d) in the direction of arrows of the board cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. 74A and 74B are sectional views (a) and (b) in the arrow direction of the board cases 1809 and 1810 at a position corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing a special position display section 541. FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram of one method for reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560. FIG. It is a typical rear view of the case part 1813 which accommodated the prize ball board 1811. It is a typical back view of case part 1823 which accommodated production board 1821. It is an exploded perspective view of assembly 2P, and control board 501 is provided with first field 1900a and second field 1900b.

(First embodiment)
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Configuration of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be explained using FIG. 1. FIG. 1 is an example of a front view of a gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The game machine 1 includes an outer frame 2, a game board mounting frame 3 rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 2, a glass frame 4 rotatably supported with respect to the game board mounting frame 3, A game board 5 is provided in which a game area 5a on which game balls flow down is formed.

The outer frame 2 has a rectangular base frame 2a whose central portion is open in the front and rear directions, and a decorative plate 2b attached to the lower front surface of the base frame 2a. ) is fixed via.

The game board mounting frame 3 is removably connected to the outer frame 2 via the first hinge mechanism 6 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported using the first hinge mechanism 6 as a fulcrum. has been done. Therefore, when the game board mounting frame 3 is rotated like a door with respect to the outer frame 2, the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 is exposed to the front, so that various devices installed on the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 are exposed. It becomes possible to carry out maintenance, etc.

The glass frame 4 is removably connected to the game board mounting frame 3 via the second hinge mechanism 7 at one end in the horizontal direction, and is rotatably supported around the second hinge mechanism 7 as a fulcrum. There is. Therefore, when the glass frame 4 is rotated with respect to the game board mounting frame 3 like a door, the game area 5a of the game board 5 and the front part of the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed.

An opening 8 (window) that opens in the front-rear direction is formed in the approximate center of the upper part of the glass frame 4, and a transparent member 8a (glass plate, acrylic plate, etc.) is formed to close the opening 8 from the rear. is attached, making the gaming area 5a visible through the opening 8 and the transparent member 8a.

Around the opening 8 of the glass frame 4, there is an audio output device 9 consisting of a speaker, a frame illumination device 10 having a plurality of decorative lamps (LEDs), and a game ball put out from a game ball payout device 100 described later. An upper tray 11 for storing a plurality of game balls such as balls, a lower tray 12 for receiving and storing game balls that do not fit into the upper tray 11 and have flowed into an overflow ball flow path to be described later, and a lower tray 12 for storing game balls. A firing operation device 13 that can be operated for firing is provided.

The audio output device 9 is provided at two locations on the upper part of the glass frame 4 with an interval between them, and outputs BGM (background music), SE (sound effects), etc. to perform sound (music, voice) production. It has become. Further, a plurality of frame illumination devices 10 are provided around the opening 8, and perform illumination effects by changing the direction and color of light emitted from each lamp (LED). The frame lighting device 10 also includes a notification LED 10a (not shown) that is controlled to turn on/flash when the glass frame 4 is opened or a dispensing abnormality described below occurs.

In the upper tray 11, the bottom surface of the game ball storage section 11a is sloped downward toward the direction of the firing operation device 13 (to the right), and a ball feeding solenoid 11b is provided at the end of the downward slope. . When the game balls stored in the storage part 11a of the upper tray 11 flow down and reach the ball sending solenoid 11b, the game balls are sent out one by one toward the game board mounting frame 3 side by the operation of the ball sending solenoid 11b.

In addition, in the center front side of the upper tray 11, there are a performance button device 16 and a selection button device 18 (see FIG. 1) that function as input devices for determining and selecting various performances, which will be described later. They are arranged side by side on the left and right.

The performance button device 16 includes a performance button 17 (not shown) that can perform a decision operation (operation input), a performance button detection switch 17a (see FIG. 2) that detects an operation on the performance button 17, and a performance button A button drive device 17b (see FIG. 2) having a button drive motor for moving the button 17 in the vertical direction is provided, and the player can input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

The selection button device 18 includes a cross key 19 (not shown) that can perform operations such as selection operations, and a cross key detection switch 19a (not shown) connected to the cross key 19 to detect operations on the cross key 19. (see FIG. 2) is provided, allowing the player to input predetermined information into the gaming machine 1.

Further, on the right side of the upper tray 11, there is provided a lending/returning operation section 20 that allows the user to perform lending operations for game balls and return operations for storage media such as cards storing balances. When the lending button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation unit 20 is operated, the ball rental machine (not shown) attached to the gaming machine 1 subtracts the balance stored in the storage medium accepted and rents out game balls. is carried out, and when a return button (not shown) of the lending/returning operation section 20 is operated, the storage medium is returned from the ball rental machine (not shown).

An overflow ball channel (not shown) is formed between the upper tray 11 and the lower tray 12 for receiving game balls that cannot fit into the upper tray 11 and guiding them to the lower tray 12. In addition, a tray full detection switch 32a (see FIG. 2) is provided in the middle of the overflow ball flow path to detect when the lower tray 12 is full of game balls. While this is being detected, the payout of game balls by the game ball payout device 100, which will be described later, is stopped.

The firing operation device 13 includes a base body 14 fixed to the glass frame 4, a firing handle 15 rotatably provided on the base body 14, and a touch sensor that detects when the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15. 15a (see FIG. 2), a firing volume 15b (see FIG. 2) consisting of a variable resistor whose resistance value changes depending on the rotation angle of the firing handle 15, and a handle light emitting device for causing the firing handle 15 to emit light in a predetermined manner. A device 15c is provided. When the touch sensor 15a detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15, the ball feeding solenoid 11b is activated and game balls are sent out one by one.

The handle light emitting device 15c constitutes the front part of the firing handle 15 and is formed in a dome shape that bulges out toward the front, and a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an internal space defined by a lens member that can transmit light. has been done. By emitting light from this LED, it is possible to perform a light emitting effect in which the firing handle 15 emits light in a predetermined manner. Furthermore, an air outlet 15d is provided at the front end of the handle light emitting device 15c, which serves as an outlet for air (air) sent out from an air blower 21, which will be described later.

On the back side of the glass frame 4, a blower device 21 for sending out wind (air) in a predetermined manner is provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13. The blower device 21 includes a blower section (not shown) for blowing out wind (air) and a blower motor (not shown) for operating the blower section. ) is sent out from the air outlet 15d toward the player's hand through the base body 14 of the firing operation device 13 and the inside of the handle light emitting device 15c. By operating this blower device 21, it is possible to perform a blowing effect in which wind (air) is sent in a predetermined manner toward the hand of the player who is operating the firing handle 15.

Note that the blower device 21 is not provided at a position corresponding to the firing operation device 13, but is provided near the decorative plate 2b of the outer frame 2 or around the transparent member 8a of the glass frame 4 to blow air (air) toward the player. ) may be sent. Further, a plurality of blowers 21 may be provided.

The game board mounting frame 3 includes a game board mounting portion 25 for mounting the game board 5, a game ball firing device 26 for firing the game ball toward the gaming area 5a, the game board mounting frame 3, and A lock mechanism 27 for locking the glass frame 4 in a closed state and an open detection switch 31a for detecting opening (opening/closing) of the glass frame 4 are provided.

The game board mounting portion 25 is formed in the shape of a concave chamber with a front opening at approximately the center near the top of the game board mounting frame 3, and the game board 5 can be stored from the front. An opening that opens in the front-rear direction is provided at the back of the concave chamber of the game board mounting portion 25, and various devices installed on the back side of the game board 5 can be installed at the rear of the game machine 1 through this opening. Coming.

The game ball launcher 26 includes a launch member 28 for launching game balls, a launch solenoid 28b (see FIG. 2) for driving the launch member 28, and a launch member 28 for driving the launch member 28 toward the lower left end of the game board. A shooting rail 29 that slopes upward and a stopper 30 that stops the game ball A at a shooting position that is the lower end of the slope of the shooting rail 29 are provided. When the game ball sent out by the ball sending solenoid 11b is received at the shooting position, the game ball A is shot out toward the game area 5a by the operation of the shooting member 28.

The lock mechanism 27 is provided on the right side of the game board mounting part 25, and the front end of the cylinder in which the keyhole is formed is exposed on the front side of the glass frame 4. Then, when a special key is inserted into the keyhole of the cylinder and rotated in one direction, the lock of the game board mounting frame 3 is released and the game board mounting frame 3 can be opened and closed, and when rotated in the other direction, the glass frame 4 is unlocked and the glass frame 4 can be opened and closed.

At a position near the outer edge of the game board 5, there are a curved inner rail 35, a curved outer rail 36 located outside the inner rail 35, and a guide member that guides the game ball toward the center of the game area 5a. 37 are provided. A firing ball guide path 38 is formed between the inner rail 35 and the outer rail 36 for guiding the game balls fired by the game ball firing device 26 to the upstream portion of the gaming area 5a. Furthermore, an out port 39 is formed at the most downstream part of the gaming area 5a to guide the game balls that have flown down to the outside of the gaming area (to the collecting section of the gaming board mounting frame 3).

Approximately in the center of the gaming area 5a, a frame-shaped decorative frame 40, called a so-called center case, that restricts the entry of game balls into the interior is provided, and a performance space 40a is formed inside the decorative frame 40. Further, a warp device 41 is provided on the side of the decorative frame 40 to introduce the game balls flowing down the game area 5a into the decorative frame 40, and a warp device 41 is provided at the lower part of the decorative frame 40 to A stage part 42 is provided for rolling the game balls introduced into the interior and making them flow down below the decorative frame 40.

At the bottom of the gaming area 5a, a plurality of (four in this embodiment) general winning holes 43 in which game balls can always be entered are provided at intervals, and these general winning holes When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) in 43 is detected by the general winning hole detection switch 43a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are awarded from the game ball payout device 100 (not shown). The ball is delivered to the upper tray 11 as a ball.

On both sides (left side area, right side area) of the game area 5a, there are provided normal game gates 44 (normal game starting area) through which the game balls can pass, and the game balls that have passed through the general game gates 44 When detected by the gate detection switch 44a (see FIG. 2), a normal symbol winning lottery (auxiliary game determination) is performed. Note that the winning lottery for normal symbols will be described later.

At the lower part of the gaming area 5a and directly below the stage part 42, a first starting opening 45 (special figure starting area) is provided in which a game ball can always enter a prize (ball), and this first starting opening 45 When a game ball that has won a prize (entered a ball) is detected by the first starting port detection switch 45a (see FIG. 2), a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are transferred from the game ball payout device 100 to the upper tray as prize balls. It is set to be paid out on the 11th. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a first special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Immediately below the first starting port 45, a game ball is placed in a closed state (basic mode) in which it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a winning lottery with a normal symbol). A variable starting section 46 is provided which is converted into an open state (special mode) in which winning (ball hitting) is possible or easy.

The variable starting section 46 includes a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) through which a game ball can enter a prize (ball entering), and a second starting port 47 (special figure starting area) that allows a game ball to enter a prize (entering ball) into the second starting port 47. A starting port detection switch 47a (see FIG. 2), a movable member 48 that converts (variably) the second starting port 47 between a closed state and an open state, and a second starting port opening/closing solenoid that opens and closes the movable member 48. 48b (see FIG. 2). When the second starting port 47 is in the closed state, it is impossible or difficult for the game ball to win, and when the second starting port 47 is in the open state, the winning of the game ball ( ball entry) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the second starting port 47 is detected by the second starting port detection switch 47a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, three) are released from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls. It is arranged to be dispensed into an upper tray 11. In addition to the payout of prize balls, a jackpot lottery (special game determination) of a second special symbol (identification information) to be described later is performed.

Above the guiding member 37 and downstream of the right-hand general figure gate 44, there is a closed state in which it is impossible to win a game ball (entering a ball) based on the establishment of a predetermined condition (winning a special symbol jackpot lottery). A variable winning section 49 is provided which is converted from the basic mode to an open state (special mode) in which a game ball can be won.

The variable winning part 49 includes a big winning hole 50 in which a game ball can be won (balls entered), and a big winning hole detection switch 50a (Fig. 2), an opening/closing member 51 for converting (variable) the big winning opening 50 between a closed state and an open state, and a big winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 51. When the grand prize opening 50 is in a closed state, it is impossible or difficult to win a game ball, and when the grand prize opening 50 is in an open state, winning a game ball (entering a ball) is difficult. ) becomes possible or easy.

Further, when a game ball that has won (entered) the big winning hole 50 is detected by the big winning hole detection switch 50a, a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 15 balls) are sent from the game ball payout device 100 as prize balls into the upper tray. It will be paid out on 11th.

On the back side of the game board 5, there are a general winning opening 43, a first starting opening 45, a second starting opening 47, and a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, A winning ball channel 52 (not shown) is provided that receives the game balls detected by the second starting opening detection switch 47a and the big winning opening detection switch 50a, and allows them to flow down while being collected.

In addition, a winning confirmation detection switch 52a (see FIG. 2) is provided in the downstream portion of the winning ball flow path 52 to detect the game ball flowing down the winning ball flow path 52 after being detected by various detection switches. This winning confirmation detection switch 52a detects the game ball again after being detected by the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, and the big winning opening detection switch 50a. This is used to determine whether it was a proper winning (ball hitting) or an abnormal winning (ball hitting).

Outside the gaming area 5a, there is a symbol display device consisting of a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, and a normal symbol display 62, a first special symbol reservation display 63, and a second special symbol display. A symbol retention display 64, and. A holding display device consisting of a normal symbol holding display 65, a round number display 66 (see FIG. 2) that displays the number of rounds when a jackpot state (special game state) described later occurs, and a jackpot game (special game state) described later. A right-hitting indicator 67 (see FIG. 2) is provided to prompt the user to fire the game ball toward the right side of the game area 5a during the game state (gaming state) or the time-saving game state.

The first special symbol display device 60 is a variable display device for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45. The second special symbol display device 61 is for displaying (notifying) the result of the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the second starting port 47. The normal symbol display device 62 is a variable display for displaying (notifying) the result of the winning lottery of the normal symbol, which is performed on the condition that a game ball enters the prize gate 44. It is a vessel.

The jackpot lottery with the first special symbol is a jackpot lottery in which random numbers for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) are acquired when a game ball enters the first starting hole 45 (ball entered), and the obtained random numbers for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the first special symbol is performed, the first special symbol is displayed in a variable manner on the first special symbol display 60, and after a predetermined period of time has elapsed, a stop display of the first special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the first special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The jackpot lottery with the second special symbol is when a game ball enters the second starting hole 47 (enters the ball), a random number value for jackpot determination, etc. (judgment information) is acquired, and the obtained random number value for jackpot determination and jackpot are obtained. This corresponds to determining whether or not it is a "jackpot" by comparing it with the judgment value. In addition, when the jackpot lottery of the second special symbol is performed, a variable display of the second special symbol is performed on the second special symbol display 61, and after a predetermined period of time, a stop display of the second special symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. be exposed. That is, the stop display of the second special symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The first special symbol display device 60 and the second special symbol display device 61 are each composed of a plurality of LEDs, and in the variable display of each special symbol, the LEDs of the corresponding display blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order. do. When the special symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LEDs are lit in a manner that indicates the result of each jackpot lottery (jackpot mode, loss mode).

In this embodiment, "jackpot" means a jackpot game (special game state) in a jackpot lottery for the first special symbol (special game determination) or a jackpot lottery for the second special symbol (special game determination). It refers to the state in which one has acquired the right to carry out the action. "Jackpot game (special game state)" refers to a game state in which a round game in which the big winning hole 50 is opened in a predetermined manner is played a predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times or 15 times).

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the big prize opening 50 in each round game are predetermined, even before the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time are reached, a predetermined number of game balls can be opened in the big winning opening 50. When (for example, 9 pieces) wins (balls entered), one round game ends. In other words, the "jackpot game (special game state)" is a game state advantageous to the player in which the player can easily win prize balls. In addition, in this embodiment, any one of a plurality of types of jackpot games (special game states) having different degrees of advantage to the player can be generated, but details will be described later.

The normal symbol winning lottery is to acquire a random number value for determining a hit when a game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44, and compare the obtained random number value for determining a hit with the winning determination value to determine whether it is a "win". This corresponds to determining whether or not. In addition, when a winning lottery of a normal symbol is performed, a variable display of the normal symbol is performed on the normal symbol display 62, and after a predetermined time has elapsed, a stop display of the normal symbol indicating the lottery result is performed. That is, the stop display of the normal symbol serves as notification of the lottery result.

The normal symbol display 62 is composed of one or a plurality of LEDs, and the LEDs blink at predetermined intervals or in a predetermined order in the variable display of the normal symbols. When the normal symbols are to be displayed in a stopped state, the LED lights up in a manner that indicates the result of the winning lottery (a winning manner or a losing manner).

In addition, in this embodiment, "winning" refers to a state in which the right to execute a winning state (auxiliary game) is acquired in a winning lottery of normal symbols. The term "winning game (auxiliary game)" refers to a game state in which the second starting port 47 is opened in a predetermined manner.

In addition, although the maximum number of openings and the maximum opening time of the second starting port 47 in the winning game (auxiliary game) are predetermined, the second starting port 47 may be opened even before the maximum number of openings or the maximum opening time is reached. The winning game (auxiliary game) ends when a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9 balls) win a prize (balls entered). In other words, the "winning game (auxiliary game)" is a game state in which the variable display of the second special symbol is likely to be executed (the start condition for the variable display is likely to be satisfied). In addition, in this embodiment, a plurality of types of winning games (auxiliary games) with different degrees of advantage to the player are provided, which will be described in detail later.

The first special symbol holding display 63 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and is a first special symbol jackpot lottery (a first special symbol This is for displaying the number of rights (first reserved memories) for performing a variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of first reserved memories. Note that although up to four first reservation memories are stored, the number may be fewer or more than four.

The second special symbol holding display 64 is constituted by a plurality of LEDs, and is a jackpot lottery of the second special symbol that is stored when a game ball enters the second starting port 47. This is for displaying the number of rights (second pending memory) for performing the variable display), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of second pending memories. In addition, although up to four second reservation memories are stored, it may be fewer or more than four.

The normal symbol holding display 65 is composed of a plurality of LEDs, and has the right to perform a normal symbol winning lottery (fluctuating display of normal symbols) that is stored when a game ball enters (passes) the common symbol gate 44. It is for displaying the number of (Fuzuzu pending memory), and lights up or blinks in a manner indicating the number of Fuzuzuzu pending memory. In addition, although up to four ordinary figures are stored in the storage, the number may be smaller or larger than four.

In addition, the 1st special symbol display 60 and/or the 2nd special symbol display 61 can also be comprised with 7 segment LED. For example, if you win a jackpot lottery with a special symbol, "7" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if you lose, "-" will be displayed in a stopped state, and if the variable display is in progress, the light will turn off and "-" will be displayed. ” should be repeated. In addition, before the start of the fluctuation display of the special symbol, the stop result of the previous fluctuation display is displayed by lighting the LED, so when the fluctuation display starts, the fluctuation display can be started by turning off the LED. It becomes easier to understand what has started.

A first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) made of a liquid crystal display is provided at the back of the production space 40a, and a , a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is provided, which is a liquid crystal display whose display area is smaller than that of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A movable performance member 73 is provided that resembles a.
Note that in this embodiment, the "first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal)" and the "second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal)" may be collectively referred to as an "image display device."

The first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) display various effects according to the progress of the game. The performance display includes a customer waiting demonstration performance that is performed when the special symbol is not being displayed in a variable manner, a fluctuating display of the performance symbol 70a that is performed when the special symbol is being displayed in a variable manner, and a notice using a character. There are performances, etc.

In addition, the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) is operated by a board drive configured by a solenoid, a motor, etc. It is possible to perform a movement effect by moving the device 75 (see FIG. 2).

Specifically, a standby position (first position) located near the end (lower side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a standby position (first position) located near the center (upper side) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A moving performance is performed by moving vertically (ascending and descending) between the performance position (second position) located at . Note that the moving direction of the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal) may be the left-right direction or the front-back direction, or the movement effect may be performed by operating the effect button 17.

Further, in the display section (effective display area) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), three columns of variable display areas such as a left side area, a center area, and a right side area are formed, and each variable display area has three columns. By scrolling the displayed performance pattern 70a vertically (from top to bottom in this embodiment), the performance pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

In addition, the production pattern 70a is composed of, for example, a pattern showing numbers from "1" to "9", and is a variable display of special symbols executed on the first special symbol display 60 and the second special symbol display 61. In response to (synchronization with), a variable display of the effect pattern 70a is performed. That is, in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is started, and in response to the stop of the variable display of the special symbols, the variable display of the performance symbols 70a is stopped. Note that, in addition to the symbols indicating numbers, symbols indicating alphabets such as "A" to "F" may be provided as the effect symbols 70a.

In the stop display of the effect pattern 70a, the effect pattern 70a is stopped for a predetermined period of time in a predetermined mode (loss mode, jackpot mode, etc.) indicating the result of the jackpot lottery. The jackpot mode (special result mode) is a combination of the same performance symbols such as "777" or the combination of regular performance symbols such as "357", and the loss mode is any other format. be. Note that the manner in which the performance symbols 70a are variably displayed is not limited to this, and may be one that scrolls in the left-right direction, or one that rotates (rotates) on the spot.

In addition, during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a, various effect images such as reach effect, background images, characters, movies, etc. are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) or the second image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), depending on the result of the jackpot lottery. By displaying it on the image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the player's expectation level for the occurrence of a jackpot (special game state) (hereinafter referred to as "jackpot winning expectation level") is increased.

Here, the reach effect is such that some of the combinations of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot temporarily stop and other effect symbols 70a change, giving the player a sense of expectation of winning a jackpot. means a variation mode. For example, when a combination of 3-digit performance symbols 70a "777" is set as a combination of performance symbols 70a to notify a jackpot (jackpot result mode), two performance symbols 70a are displayed in the left and right regions. 7'', the game stops temporarily, and the remaining performance symbols 70a are fluctuating in the central area.

It should be noted that "temporary stop" means that the performance symbols 70a are slightly swayed or deformed slightly to make it appear to the player that the performance symbols 70a are stopped (not completely stopped). (not).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, there are five types of reach effects: "normal reach effect," "SP reach effect," "SPSP reach effect," and "full rotation reach effect."

"Normal reach effect" means that the background image before the normal reach effect is displayed, two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a is stopped in the center area. It refers to a fluctuating reach performance.

"SP reach effect" means that two effect symbols 70a are temporarily stopped in the left and right areas, and the remaining effect pattern 70a remains fluctuating in the center area, and the movie (video) is longer than the movie related to the normal reach effect. , animation, etc.).

"SPSP reach effect" means that the two effect symbols 70a temporarily stop in the left and right areas, and the remaining one effect figure 70a remains in the central area for a longer period of time than the movie related to the SP reach effect (long length). This is a reach performance in which a movie (video, animation, etc.) is played.

The "full rotation reach effect" is a reach effect that changes at a low speed when all the combinations of the plurality of effect symbols 70a that notify a jackpot are aligned. In this embodiment, this is a reach effect that is executed only when winning a jackpot lottery.

In this embodiment, the jackpot winning expectation regarding the reach effect is higher in the order of normal reach effect<SP reach effect<SPSP reach effect<full rotation reach effect (jackpot confirmed).

Further, on the display section of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), the number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1), which is the current number of first pending memories, is displayed. a first pending icon display area 70B, and a second pending icon display area 70D for displaying a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2), which is the current number of second pending memories. An icon display area 70C is formed for displaying the icon corresponding to (related to) the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) being executed.

The first pending icon display area 70B is divided into a first display area 70B1, a second display area 70B2, a third display area 70B3, and a fourth display area 70B4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70B1 to 70B4 display a number of first pending icons corresponding to the first special symbol pending number (U1). In other words, the number of first reserved icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the number of reserved first special symbols (U1).

Specifically, the first display section 70B1 displays a first pending icon H11 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is first performed, and the second display section 70B2 displays the first pending icon H11. The first pending icon H12 indicating the first pending memory is displayed on which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed third, and the third display section 70B3 displays the variable display of the first special symbol. A first pending icon H13 indicating the first pending memory is displayed, and the fourth display section 70B4 displays a first pending icon H14 indicating the first pending memory in which the variable display of the first special symbol is executed fourth. be done.

The second pending icon display area 70D is divided into a first display area 70D1, a second display area 70D2, a third display area 70D3, and a fourth display area 70D4 from the side closest to the icon display area 70C. The display units 70D1 to 70D4 display a number of second pending icons corresponding to the second special symbol pending number (U2). In other words, the number of second pending icons also increases or decreases in response to an increase or decrease in the second special symbol pending number (U2).

Specifically, the first display unit 70D1 displays a second hold icon H21 indicating the second hold memory in which the variable display of the second special symbol is first performed, and the second display unit 70D2 displays the second hold icon H21. A second pending icon H22 indicating a second pending memory is displayed in which the variable display of the second special symbol is executed third, and the variable display of the second special symbol is displayed in the third display section 70D3. A second pending icon H23 indicating a second pending memory is displayed, and a second pending icon H24 indicating a second pending memory in which variable display of the second special symbol is executed fourth is displayed on the fourth display section 70D4. be done. In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "first reservation number" and the "second special symbol reservation number" may be referred to as the "second reservation number".

The icon display area 70C displays the first pending icon or the second pending icon that was displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B in response to the start of the variable display of the special symbol (production symbol 70a). When the second pending icon displayed on the first display section 70D1 of the pending icon display area 70D moves (shifts), the icon TH is displayed, and at the end of the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a) The icon TH disappears (erases). Note that the icon may disappear during the variable display of the special symbol (effect symbol 70a). In addition, in this embodiment, the "first pending icon", the "second pending icon", and "the icon" may be collectively referred to as "icon".

The movable effect member 73 is illuminated by a board illumination device 74 having a plurality of lamps (LEDs, etc.) during the variable display of the effect pattern 70a executed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). It is possible to perform a light emitting effect, and it is possible to perform a moving effect by moving the board using a board drive device 75 (see FIG. 2) composed of a solenoid, a motor, and the like.

Specifically, a light emitting effect is performed by emitting light from a plurality of lamps (such as LEDs) in a predetermined color in accordance with the progress of the variable display of the effect pattern 70a. In addition, there is a standby position (first position) located near the end (above) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a standby position (first position) located near the center (below) of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). A moving performance is performed by moving (ascending and descending) in the vertical direction between the performance position (second position) and the performance position (second position). It should be noted that the configuration may be such that a light emission effect or a movement effect is performed by operating the effect button 17.

On the back side of the game board mounting frame 3 and the game board 5, there is a game ball payout device 100 for paying out game balls based on establishment of predetermined payout conditions (prize ball, ball rental), island equipment, etc. A game ball storage section 101 (not shown) that stores supplied game balls and supplies them to the game ball payout device 100, and a main control device 110A (not shown) that incorporates a main control board 110 that centrally controls the progress of the game. ), a payout control device 120A (not shown) incorporating a payout control board 120 that controls the game ball payout device 100 according to payout control commands from the main control board 110, and production control commands from the main control board 110. A production control device 130A (not shown) containing a production control board 130 that controls production according to the performance, and a power supply device 160A (not shown) containing a power supply board 160 that supplies power voltage to various control devices. A game information output terminal board 90 (see FIG. 2) is provided for outputting game information (game signals) to the outside of the game machine.

(Control configuration of gaming machine 1)
Next, the control configuration of the gaming machine 1 will be specifically explained using FIG. 2. FIG. 2 is an overall block diagram of the gaming machine 1 in this embodiment.

The main control board 110 centrally controls the progress of the game (basic operations). The main control board 110 includes a main CPU 110a that performs calculation processing, a main ROM 110b that stores game control programs, etc., and a main RAM 110c (corresponding to volatile storage means) that serves as a work area during calculation processing. It is equipped with a chip microcomputer 110m, an input port for main control, an output port, etc. The main CPU 110a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator, reads out a program stored in the main ROM 110b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the game while utilizing the main RAM 110c as a work area. and transmits predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the payout control board 120, the production control board 130, etc.

Here, the communication between the main control board 110 and the payout control board 120 is configured to be able to communicate commands (data) in both directions, and the communication between the main control board 110 and the production control board 130 is It is configured so that commands (data) can be communicated only in one direction from 110 to the production control board 130.

The input ports of the main control board 110 include a general winning opening detection switch 43a, a gate detection switch 44a, a first starting opening detection switch 45a, a second starting opening detection switch 47a, a big winning opening detection switch 50a, and a winning confirmation detection switch 52a. , a magnetic detection sensor 53a, a radio wave detection sensor 54a, a RAM clear switch 55a, a payout control board 120, and the like are connected. When detection signals and the like from various detection switches and various detection sensors are input to the main control board 110 via the input port, control processing is performed according to the detection signals.

The output ports of the main control board 110 include a second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, a big prize opening opening/closing solenoid 51b, a first special symbol display 60, a second special symbol display 61, a normal symbol display 62, and a first special symbol display. The symbol retention display 63, the second special symbol retention display 64, the normal symbol retention display 65, the number of rounds display 66, the right-handed display 67, the game information output terminal board 90, the performance control board 130, etc. are connected has been done. Drive control signals for controlling various solenoids, display control signals for controlling various indicators, and game notifications to the outside of the gaming machine (hall computer, etc.) from the gaming information output terminal board through the output port. Information etc. are output.

The payout control board 120 is a slave control board that controls the payout of game balls based on reception of the payout command from the main control board 110, and also controls the firing of game balls. The payout control board 120 includes a payout control section 121 that drives the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of game balls, and a launch control section 122 that drives the game ball launcher 26 to control the launch of the game balls.

The payout control unit 121 includes a payout CPU 121a that performs calculation processing, a payout ROM 121b that stores a payout program, etc., a payout RAM 121c that serves as a work area during calculation processing, an input port for payout control, an output port, etc. . The payout CPU 121a receives an operation clock from a crystal oscillator (not shown), reads a payout control program stored in the payout ROM 121b, performs arithmetic processing related to the payout of game balls while utilizing the payout RAM 121c as a work area, and operates the game ball payout device. 100, and sends predetermined commands based on the results of arithmetic processing to the main control board 110, the production control board 130, etc.

The input port of the payout control unit 121 includes an open detection switch 31a, a tray full detection switch 32a, a payout ball detection switch 100a provided in the game ball payout device 100, and a ball presence detection switch 101a provided in the game ball storage unit 101. A payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 is connected to an output port of the payout control unit 121.

When the payout control unit 121 receives the payout command from the main control board 110, it drives the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100 to control the payout of a predetermined number of game balls, and the putout ball detection switch 100a controls the payout motor 100b provided in the game ball payout device 100. When the payout of a predetermined number of game balls is detected, the control for paying out game balls is ended.

The firing control unit 122 includes a control circuit, an input port, an output port, etc. (not shown). A touch sensor 15a and a firing volume 15b are connected to an input port of the firing control unit 122, and a ball feeding solenoid 11b, a firing solenoid 28b, etc. are connected to an output port of the firing control unit 122. ing.

When the firing control unit 122 detects that the player's hand is touching the firing handle 15 based on the touch signal input from the touch sensor 15a, it allows the ball feeding solenoid 11b and the firing solenoid 28b to be energized. When it is detected that the rotation angle of the firing handle 15 has changed based on the detection signal from the firing volume 15b, the ball feed solenoid 11b is driven and the ball is fired so that the firing intensity corresponds to the rotation angle of the firing handle 15. The game ball is fired by driving the solenoid 28b.

The firing solenoid 28b is composed of a rotary solenoid, and the launching member 28 is directly connected to a rotating shaft, and as the rotating shaft rotates, the launching member 28 rotates and launches the game ball A. . Note that the operation of the firing solenoid 28b is set to approximately 99.9 times/minute based on the frequency based on the output cycle of the crystal oscillator provided in the firing control unit 122, so the firing of the game ball in one minute is approximately 99.9 times per minute. The number is approximately 99.9 (pieces/minute). That is, the game ball will be fired approximately every 0.6 seconds.

The performance control board 130 is a slave control board (slave control means) that controls the performance related to the game (performed in the gaming machine 1) based on the reception of the performance command from the main control board 110. The effect control board 130 includes a sub-CPU 130a that performs arithmetic processing, a sub-ROM 130b in which an effect control program is stored, a sub-RAM 130c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and an effect control unit 130m, and a first image display device 70 (main display/audio control unit 140 that controls the second image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal), the audio output device 9 (speaker), etc., the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button drive device 17b, and the blower device. 21, a board lighting device 74, a board drive device 75, etc., a lamp/drive control section 150, and an input port, an output port, etc. for performance control.

The sub CPU 130a receives the operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads the game program stored in the sub ROM 130b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the performance while using the sub RAM 130c as a work area, thereby processing commands received from the main control board 110. Control is performed in order to cause various control units (display/audio control unit 140, lamp/drive control unit 150) to execute various effects in accordance with input signals from the effect button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a. output data or commands).

An effect button detection switch 17a, a cross key detection switch 19a, etc. are connected to the input port of the effect control board 130. In the production control board 130, a production button detection signal indicating that the production button 17 has been operated is input from the production button detection switch 17a, and a cross key detection signal indicating that the cross key 19 has been operated is input from the cross key detection switch 19a. When a signal (upper button detection signal, left button detection signal, lower button detection signal, right button detection signal) is input, processing is performed to execute an effect according to the detection signal.

The display/audio control section 140 controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display a predetermined image in response to a command from the production control section 130m. and controls the audio output device 9 to output a predetermined audio.

The display/audio control unit 140 includes an overall control unit 141 that includes an overall CPU 142 that performs arithmetic processing, an overall ROM 143 that stores an overall control program, an overall RAM 144 that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, and a VDP (as an image processor). An image control unit 145 consisting of a video display processor), a CGROM 146 in which image data etc. are stored, and a frame buffer etc. provided inside the image control unit 145 that temporarily stores drawing data generated from the image data. A VRAM 147, an audio control unit 148 as an audio processor, an audio ROM 149 storing audio data, and input/output ports.

The general CPU 142 receives the operating clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the display control program stored in the general ROM 143, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the general RAM 144 as a work area, thereby executing the operation clock received from the effect control unit 130m. In response to production instruction commands and the like, it controls the image control unit 145 and the audio control unit 148 to execute various productions (outputs data and commands).

The control ROM 143 is composed of a mask ROM, etc., and displays a display control program for displaying images, a display list generation program for generating a display list consisting of a group of drawing control commands, and animation of a production pattern. Anime patterns, anime scene information, etc. are stored.

This animation pattern is referred to when displaying the animation that constitutes the specific content of the image production, and is associated with animation scene information, the display order of each animation scene, etc. The animation scene information includes weight frames (display time), target data (sprite identification number, transfer source address, etc.), drawing parameters (sprite display position, display magnification, transparency, etc.), and drawing method. , the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

The image control unit 145 (VDP) is connected to a CGROM 146 in which various image data is stored, and receives commands (display list, drawing commands, etc.) from the overall control unit 141 (overall CPU 142) and the data stored in the CGROM 146. Based on the image data, drawing data that is the source of a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) is generated. The image data includes an image (frame) to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), for example, a production pattern image, a background image forming the background of the production pattern. This is material data representing individual images such as , character images, and dialogue images. On the other hand, the drawing data is synthetic data representing an image of the entire frame, which is formed by combining (overlapping) individual images.

The CGROM 146 is composed of flash memory, EEPROM, EPROM, mask ROM, etc., and compresses and stores image data (sprite, movie), etc., which is a collection of pixel information in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, 32 x 32 pixels). ing. Note that the pixel information is composed of color number information that specifies a color number for each pixel and an α value that indicates the transparency of the image. This CGROM 146 is read out in units of image data by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and image processing is performed in units of image data of this frame.

Further, the CGROM 146 stores, without compression, palette data in which color number information specifying a color number is associated with display color information for actually displaying the color. Note that the CGROM 146 may have a configuration in which only a part of the image data is compressed, rather than all of the image data. Further, as a movie compression method, various known compression methods such as MPEG4 can be used.

The VRAM 147 is composed of an SRAM that can write or read image data at high speed. This VRAM 143 includes a display list storage area for temporarily storing a display list output from the overall control unit 141 (main CPU 142), a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and a second image display device 71 (sub It has a frame buffer area etc. corresponding to the liquid crystal display.

This frame buffer area is a storage area for drawing or displaying images, and further includes a first frame buffer area and a second frame buffer area. The first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are alternately switched to a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer" each time drawing starts.

Therefore, the image control unit 145 (VDP) transfers the drawing data stored in the CGROM 146 to the “drawing frame buffer” in the frame buffer area of the VRAM 147 based on instructions (display list) from the general control unit 141 (main CPU 142). , reads the drawing data from the "display frame buffer" in the frame buffer area, generates a video signal (RGB signal, etc.) based on the read drawing data, and generates a first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), Then, it is output to the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal) to display various images.

Note that the image control unit 145 (VDP) is supplied with an operating clock from a crystal oscillator, and by frequency-dividing this operating clock, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display Generates a synchronization signal (horizontal synchronization signal/vertical synchronization signal) for synchronizing with the device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and displays the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Output to. In this embodiment, the frame rate of the image control unit 145 (VDP) is 30 fps (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 30 times per second. It may be set to 60 fps (1/60 second = approximately 16.6 ms) so that drawing (image display) is performed 60 times per second.

Also, between the image control unit 145, the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), there is a general-purpose device that converts image data into a predetermined image format and outputs it. A substrate 72 is connected. The general-purpose board 72 has a bridge function to convert image data into an image format compatible with the performance of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). For example, the difference in resolution between when a 19-inch SXGA (1280 dots x 1080 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected and when a 17-inch XGA (1024 dots x 768 dots) liquid crystal display device is connected. Absorb.

The audio control unit 148 is connected to the audio output device 9, and controls the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) based on various performance data (including commands) transmitted from the performance control unit 130m. Control is performed to output audio data, music data (BGM, SE), etc. from the audio output device 9 in accordance with the display on the two-image display device 71 (sub-liquid crystal).

The lamp/drive control unit 150 includes a lamp CPU 150a that performs arithmetic processing, a lamp ROM 150b that stores a lamp/drive control program, a lamp RAM 150c that serves as a work area during arithmetic processing, input/output ports, and the like.

The lamp CPU 150a receives an operation clock from the crystal oscillator, reads out the lamp/drive control program stored in the lamp ROM 150b, and performs arithmetic processing related to the effect while utilizing the lamp RAM 150c as a work area. In response to received performance instruction commands, etc., control is performed to cause controlled devices such as various lighting devices and various driving devices to perform predetermined performances (data and commands are output).

The frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, the button driving device 17b, the air blower 21, and the panel lighting device 74 are connected to the input/output ports of the lamp/drive control section, and the production control section 130m (sub CPU 130a ) Based on various performance data (including commands) sent from the controller, lighting control of various LEDs of the frame lighting device 10, the handle light emitting device 15c, and the panel lighting device 74 is performed to perform light emitting effects, etc. Or, by controlling drive sources such as the button drive device 17b, the blower device 21, and the motor and solenoid of the panel drive device 75, motion effects (the above-mentioned movement effects), etc. are performed.

The power supply board 160 generates the main power (operating power) necessary for the operation of the gaming machine from the power supplied from the outside of the gaming machine, and supplies the main power to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, (the production control board 130 and various electronic components). The power supply board 160 includes a power outage detection circuit 162 that detects whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 based on the occurrence of a power outage (power outage). A backup power supply circuit 163 is provided for supplying backup power to the main control board 110 during a power outage (power outage).

In addition, the power supply board 160 is used to switch between an ON state in which main power is supplied to the gaming machine 1 (main control board 110, payout control board 120, performance control board 130, and various electronic components) and an OFF state in which the supply of main power is stopped. A power switch is provided so that it can be operated by a clerk at the game parlor, and when the power switch is turned on, supply of main power is started and the operation of the game machine 1 is started. Note that even if the power switch is in the OFF state, the supply of backup power to the main control board 110 is maintained.

The power outage detection circuit 162 monitors the power supply voltage supplied to the gaming machine 1, and outputs a power outage detection signal to the main control board 110 when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value. More specifically, the main CPU 110a becomes operational when the power interruption detection signal becomes high level, and the main CPU 110a enters an operational state when the power interruption detection signal becomes low level.

The backup power supply circuit 163 includes a capacitor that stores electricity when power is applied to the gaming machine, and when a power outage (power outage) occurs, the backup power supply voltage stored in the capacitor is transferred to the main RAM 110c of the main control board 110. supply As a result, even in the event of a power outage (power outage), the memory contents of the main RAM 110c and payout RAM 121c will be retained, and after recovery from the power outage (power outage), the gaming control state will be returned to the state before the power outage (power outage). It can be restored. Note that backup power may be supplied to the payout control board 120 and the production control board 130.

(Explanation of gaming status)
Next, the game state when the game progresses will be explained. In this embodiment, the states related to the special symbol jackpot lottery include a "low probability game state" and the "high probability game state", and the state related to the movable member 48 of the second starting port 47 is "non-time saving game". ``state'' and ``time-saving gaming state.''

In this embodiment, the following three game states are provided.
(1) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "non-time-saving gaming state." (2) A low-probability non-time-saving gaming state that is a "low-probability gaming state" and a "time-saving gaming state." (3) " A high-probability time-saving gaming state that is a “high-probability gaming state” and a “time-saving gaming state.”

Note that the gaming state when the game is started, that is, the initial gaming state of the gaming machine 1, is set to the "low-probability non-time-saving gaming state", and this gaming state is referred to as the "normal gaming state" in this embodiment. ”. In addition, in this embodiment, the "low probability time saving gaming state" and the "high probability time saving gaming state" are gaming states that are more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, so they may be referred to as "specific gaming states". .

In this embodiment, the "low probability gaming state" refers to a jackpot lottery in which a special symbol jackpot lottery is held on the condition that a game ball enters the first starting port 45 or the second starting port 47. This refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning is set as low as, for example, 1/299. On the other hand, a "high probability gaming state" refers to a gaming state in which the probability of winning a jackpot is higher than that of a low probability gaming state, and the probability of winning a jackpot is set as high as, for example, 1/59.8. . Therefore, in the "high probability gaming state", it is easier to win a jackpot than in the "low probability gaming state". Note that the low probability gaming state is changed to the high probability gaming state after the jackpot game described below is completed.

In this embodiment, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a high probability gaming state is referred to as a "probable jackpot." Further, a jackpot that triggers a transition to a low probability gaming state is referred to as a "normal jackpot."

In this embodiment, the "non-time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the normal symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. This is a game state in which the time is set longer than the "time-saving game state" and the opening time of the second starting port 47 when winning is easily set to be short. For example, when a game ball passes through the normal pattern gate 44, a winning lottery for the normal pattern is performed, and a variable display of the normal pattern is performed on the normal pattern display 62, but after the variable display of the normal pattern starts, For example, the display stops after 30 seconds. If the lottery result is a win, the second starting port 47 is controlled to be open for, for example, 0.2 seconds after the normal symbols are stopped and displayed.

On the other hand, the "time-saving gaming state" refers to the average fluctuation time of the normal symbols corresponding to the lottery result in the winning lottery of the regular symbols that is performed on the condition that the game ball passes through the regular symbol gate 44. A gaming state in which the opening time of the second starting port 47 when a winning is won is set to be shorter than the "non-time-saving gaming state" and longer than the "non-time-saving gaming state", for example, 2.5 seconds. say. Furthermore, in the "non-time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set as low as, for example, 1/128, and in the "time-saving gaming state", the probability of winning in the normal symbol lottery is set to be low, for example, 127. It is set as high as /128. Therefore, in the "time-saving game state", when the game ball passes through the regular game gate 44, the second starting port 47 is more easily controlled in the open mode than in the "non-time-saving game state". As a result, in the "time-saving gaming state", the player can advantageously proceed with the game without consuming game balls.

In addition, in the embodiment, the "time-saving gaming state" is advantageous in the fluctuation time of the normal symbols, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the probability of winning the normal symbol lottery, compared to the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is set like this. However, the "time-saving gaming state" may be set so that only one of the normal symbol variation time, the opening time of the second starting port 47, and the winning probability of the normal symbol lottery is advantageous. . Further, in the non-time-saving gaming state, the probability of winning in the normal symbol winning lottery may be set to, for example, 0/128.

(Type of jackpot)
Next, types of jackpots will be explained.

In this embodiment, the types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls into the first starting hole 45 are "first jackpot," "second jackpot," and "third jackpot." The types of jackpots that can be won in the jackpot lottery based on the winning of game balls into the second starting hole 47 include "first jackpot" and "second jackpot".

"First jackpot" is a first jackpot game in which a round game in which the jackpot 50 is opened for a maximum of 29.5 seconds and then closed for 2 seconds is executed up to 10 times. It's a big hit. In addition, in the round game, one round game ends when a specified number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

After the first jackpot game ends, the high accuracy time-saving game state is set until the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) are displayed in a variable manner 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

The "second jackpot" is a jackpot in which a second jackpot game is executed in which a round game is executed up to 10 times. After the second jackpot game ends, the low-accuracy time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 100 times.

The "third jackpot" is a jackpot in which a third jackpot game is executed in which a round game is executed up to four times. After the end of the third jackpot game, the highly accurate time-saving game state is set until the variable display of the special symbols (first special symbol, second special symbol) is performed 10,000 times. Therefore, considering the jackpot winning probability in the high probability gaming state, the next jackpot is virtually guaranteed.

In addition, the number of fluctuation displays (in this embodiment, the above-mentioned 100 times or 10,000 times) of the specific gaming state (high probability time saving gaming state, low probability time saving gaming state) set after the jackpot game is referred to as "high probability". It is sometimes expressed as "number of times" or "time-saving number of times."

In this embodiment, there are three types of jackpots, but the number is not limited to three, and there may be fewer or more than three types. In addition, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 is set to 29.5 seconds regardless of the jackpot (first jackpot to third jackpot), but the opening time may not be 29.5 seconds, and depending on the round game Different opening times may be used.

(type of win)
Next, the types of wins will be explained.

In this embodiment, there are "first win" and "second win" as the types of wins that can be won in the winning lottery based on the passage of the game ball to the game ball gate 44, and the winning lottery is executed. If the gaming state when the winning lottery is executed is a non-time saving gaming state, it will be a "first win", and if the gaming state when the winning lottery is executed is a time saving gaming state, it will be a "second winning".

The "first win" is a win in which a first win game is executed in which the second starting port 47 is opened for a maximum of 0.2 seconds. In other words, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened once.

"Second win" is a win in which the second starting port 47 is opened for 2.6 seconds, closed for 1.5 seconds, and opened again for 2.6 seconds. . In other words, it is a winning game in which the movable member 48 is opened twice.

In addition, in the first winning game and the second winning game, the winning game ends when a specified number of game balls (for example, 10) enter the big winning hole 50 even before the opening time has elapsed.

In this way, in the "time-saving gaming state", it is easier for game balls to enter the second starting port 47, and the player can play the game more advantageously without consuming game balls than in the "non-time-saving gaming state". It is possible to proceed.

Next, the progress of the game in the gaming machine 1 will be explained using a flowchart.

(Main processing of main control board)
The main processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 3. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the main control board 110.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the main CPU 110a, and the main CPU 110a performs the following main processing.

First, the main CPU 110a performs initialization processing in step S10. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the startup program is read from the main ROM 110b, and the flags and the like stored in the main RAM 110c are initialized.

In step S20, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the random number value for reach determination and the random number value for special symbol determination for determining the variation mode (variation time) of the special symbol, and in step S30, updates the random number value for determining the special symbol. An initial value random value update process is performed to update the initial value random value, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination.

Next, the main CPU 110a determines whether a power outage (power outage) has occurred in step S40. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power outage detection signal is input from the power outage detection circuit of the power supply board 160, and if the power outage detection signal is not input, the process moves to step S20 and the power outage detection is performed. If a signal is input, the process moves to step S41.

The main CPU 110a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step S41, performs processing to clear the output port in step S42, and calculates a checksum in the main RAM 110c and stores it in a predetermined memory in step S43. In step S44, a backup flag to be referenced when recovering from a power outage is turned ON.In step S45, a process is performed to prohibit RAM access, and the supply of power supply voltage is completely cut off. Wait until it drips.

(Timer interrupt processing of main control board)
The timer interrupt processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 4. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed in the main control board 110 at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds).

First, in step S100, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, the main CPU 110a saves the information stored in the register to the stack area, and in step S110, updates the special symbol time counter, the special game timer counter such as the opening time of special electric accessories, etc. It performs time control processing for updating various timer counters, such as updating processing of , normal symbol time counter updating processing, and updating processing of opening/closing time of the movable member 48 . Specifically, 1 is subtracted from counters such as a special symbol time counter, a special game timer counter, a normal symbol time counter, a starting port opening timer counter, and a starting port closing timer counter.

In step S120, the main CPU 110a determines a random value for determining a jackpot, a random value for determining a special symbol, a random value for determining a special pattern variation pattern, a random value for determining a hit, a random value for determining a normal symbol, and a random value for determining a regular symbol variation pattern. Performs specific random number update processing to update random numbers. Specifically, each random value and random number counter are updated by adding +1. In addition, if the added random number counter exceeds the maximum value of the random number range (when the random number counter completes one cycle), the random number counter is returned to 0, and when the random number counter returns to the initial value of the cycle, the corresponding The initial value random value is set as a new round initial value, and the random value is newly updated.

In step S130, the main CPU 110a, similarly to step S30, sets the initial value random value for jackpot determination, the initial value random value for special symbol determination, the initial value random value for hit determination, and the initial value random value for normal symbol determination. Perform initial value random value update processing to be updated.

In step S200, the main CPU 110a controls the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the gate detection switch 44a, the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, etc. It determines whether or not there is an input to each switch, and performs input control processing to set predetermined data if there is an input. The details will be described later using FIG. 5.

In step S300, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol special electric control for performing special symbol memory determination (jackpot determination, etc.), display control of special symbols, opening/closing control of the major prize opening 50 (opening/closing member 51), control of gaming state, etc. Perform processing. The details will be described later using FIG. 7.

In step S400, the main CPU 110a performs a normal symbol general electric control process for performing normal symbol memory determination (hit determination, etc.), normal symbol display control, opening/closing control of the second starting port 47 (movable member 48), etc. .

Next, in step S500, the main CPU 110a transmits a payout state confirmation command to the payout control board 120 for checking the payout state of the payout control board 120, and sends a prize ball counter (3 prize ball counter, 10 award balls counter, 15 award balls counter), and performs payout control processing for transmitting payout number designation commands corresponding to various winning holes to the payout control board 120. As a result, the payout control board 120 executes control for paying out prize balls from the game ball payout device 100.

In step S600, the main CPU 110a determines the occurrence of a magnetic abnormality or a radio wave abnormality based on the input signals from the magnetic detection sensor 53a and the radio wave detection sensor 54a, and issues a magnetic abnormality error specification command and a radio wave abnormality error specification command. Performs magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination processing for transmitting commands to the production control board 130. In addition, when the production control board 130 receives the error designation command for magnetic abnormality or the error designation command for radio wave abnormality, it performs control to perform magnetic abnormality error notification or radio wave abnormality error notification.

In step S700, the main CPU 110a outputs external information data (gaming information) from the gaming information output terminal board 90, starting opening opening/closing data outputting to the second starting opening opening/closing solenoid 48b, and large winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b. Winning opening/closing data, special symbol display data output to the first special symbol display 60 and second special symbol display 61, normal symbol display data output to the normal symbol display 62, first special symbol pending display 63, and Data creation processing is performed to create data such as special symbol retention display data to be output to the second special symbol retention display 64 and normal symbol retention display data to be output to the normal symbol retention display 65.

In step S800, the main CPU 110a performs port output processing to output signals such as the external information data created in step S700, starting opening opening/closing data, and big winning opening opening/closing data, special symbol display data, and normal symbol display data. , a display output process that outputs signals such as special symbol pending display data, normal symbol pending display data, etc., and a payout command transmission process that transmits a command set in the payout transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the payout control board 120. Also, an output control process is performed to execute a production command transmission process for transmitting a command set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c to the production control board 130.

The types of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 will be described later using FIGS. 8 and 9.

In step S900, the main CPU 110a restores the information saved in step S100 to the register of the main CPU 110a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Input control processing of main control board)
The input control processing of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 5. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing input control processing in the main control board 110.

The main CPU 110a performs general winning opening detection switch input processing in step S210. In this general winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning hole 43. If there is no detection signal input from the general winning opening detection switch 43a, the process moves to step S220.

When a detection signal is input from the general winning hole detection switch 43a, the prize ball counter (10 prize balls counter) for the general winning hole used for prize balls is updated by adding data indicating 10 prize balls. Then, after adding "1" to the winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the winning hole and updating it (D←D+1), the general winning hole detection switch input process is ended.

The main CPU 110a performs a big winning opening detection switch input process in step S220. In this big winning hole detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal has been input from the big winning hole detection switch 50a, that is, whether or not the game ball has entered the big winning hole 50. If there is no detection signal input from the big winning opening detection switch 50a, the process moves to step S230.

When the detection signal from the big winning opening detection switch 50a is input, data indicating 15 winning balls is added to the winning ball counter (15 winning balls counter) for the big winning opening used for winning balls. Update the winning ball counter (D) that indicates the number of game balls that entered the winning slot by adding "1" (D←D+1), and check whether the current gaming state is in the special gaming state. Determine whether If the current gaming state is a special gaming state, the round winning counter (C) for counting the game balls that have entered the big winning hole 50 is updated by adding "1" (C←C+1). , ends the big winning opening detection switch input process.

If the current gaming state is not a special gaming state, the number of illegal winning balls that have won (balls entered) in the specific winning opening (second starting opening 47, big winning opening 50) outside the winning winning period. Add "1" to the counter (E) and update it (E←E+1), determine whether the value of the illegal winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number (for example, 10), and If the value of the ball counter (E) is less than or equal to the specified number, the big winning opening detection switch input process is ended.

If the value of the illegal prize winning ball counter (E) is greater than the specified number, an illegal prize winning (unauthorized winning ball) in which a game ball wins a prize (balls entered) outside the winning period has occurred, and an error for fraudulent prize winning is designated. Set the command to the performance transmission data storage area. As a result, an error specifying command for fraudulent winning is transmitted to the production control board 130, and the production control board 130 issues a fraudulent winning error notification to notify that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

Then, external information data (output data) for outputting an illegal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 is set in a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, the illegal winning ball counter (E) is cleared, and the big winning opening is detected. End switch input processing. As a result, a fraudulent winning signal is output from the game information output terminal board 90, and it becomes possible for an external device to grasp (specify) that a fraudulent winning has occurred.

The main CPU 110a performs a first starting port detection switch input process in step S230. In this first starting port detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has entered the first starting port 45 or not. The details will be described later using FIG. 6.

The main CPU 110a performs second starting port detection switch input processing in step S240. In this second starting port detection switch input process, substantially the same process as the first starting port detection switch input process shown in FIG. 6, which will be described later, is performed.

The main CPU 110a performs gate detection switch input processing in step S250. In this gate detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the gate detection switch 44a has been input, that is, whether the game ball has passed through the regular figure gate 44 or not. If no detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, the gate detection switch input process ends.

When a detection signal is input from the gate detection switch 44a, it is determined whether or not the number of regular symbols held, which is the number of regular symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved storage area, is less than four. If the number of reserved ordinary figures is not less than 4, the gate detection switch input process is ended.

If the number of reserved symbols is less than 4, add "1" to the number of reserved symbols and update it, and set the random number for hit determination, the random number for determining normal symbols, and the random number for determining fluctuation pattern of ordinary symbols. The random number value is acquired, and the vacant storage parts are searched in order from the first storage part in the normal symbol holding storage area, the acquired random number value is stored in the vacant storage part, and the gate detection switch input process is completed.

The main CPU 110a performs winning confirmation detection switch input processing in step S260. In this winning confirmation detection switch input process, it is determined whether a detection signal from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a has been input, that is, whether or not the game ball has passed through the winning ball flow path 52. If no detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the input control process is ended.

When a detection signal is input from the winning confirmation detection switch 52a, the winning ball counter (D) is updated by subtracting "1" (D←D-1), and the value of the winning ball counter (D) reaches the upper limit ( For example, 20) and a lower limit value (for example, -10) is determined.

If the value of the winning ball counter (D) is not within the range between the upper limit value and the lower limit value, it is assumed that an abnormal winning (ball winning) has occurred, and an error designation command for abnormal winning is sent to the performance transmission data storage area. Set the external information data (output data) for outputting the abnormal winning signal from the game information output terminal board 90 to a predetermined area of the main RAM 110c, clear the winning ball counter (D), and switch the winning confirmation detection switch. Finish input processing. In addition, the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the abnormal winning error designation command issues an abnormal winning error notification to notify that an abnormal winning has occurred.

(Input processing of the first starting port detection switch on the main control board)
The first starting port detection switch input process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. 6. FIG. 6 is a flowchart showing the first starting port detection switch input process in the main control board 110.

First, in step S230-1, the main CPU 110a determines whether a detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a has been input. If the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is input, the process moves to step S230-2, and if the detection signal from the first starting port detection switch 45a is not input, the current 1 Finish the starting port detection switch input process.

In step S230-2, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls by adding data indicating 3 prize balls, and in step S230-3, the main CPU 110a performs a process of updating the 3-prize ball counter used for prize balls, and in step S230-3, the winning hole is A winning ball counter (D) indicating the number of game balls that have entered the game is updated by adding "1" (D←D+1).

In step S230-4, the main CPU 110a determines whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1), which is the number of first reservation memories stored in the first special symbol reservation storage area, is less than four. . If the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is less than 4, the process moves to step S230-5, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not less than 4, the current first start The mouth detection switch input process ends.

In step S230-5, the main CPU 110a performs a process of adding "1" to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) and updating it (U1←U1+1), and in step S230-6, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number of reserved symbols (U1) is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

In step S230-7, the main CPU 110a acquires the special figure determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, random value for determining special symbol fluctuation pattern), and obtains the first special Empty storage parts are sequentially searched from the first storage part in the symbol retention storage area, and the acquired special symbol determination information is stored in the empty storage parts.

As a result of the above, the predetermined storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area stores special symbol determination information (random value for jackpot determination, random value for special symbol determination, random value for reach determination, and special symbol fluctuation pattern determination). A first pending memory consisting of random numbers, etc.) will be stored.

The main CPU 110a performs a first preliminary determination process in step S230-8. In this first preliminary determination process, the preliminary determination table (not shown) is referred to, and the currently acquired special symbol determination information (first pending memory) is stored before the special symbol fluctuation display based on the determination information is performed. A planned variation pattern, which is a variation pattern to be executed, is determined.

In step S230-9, the main CPU 110a sets the first starting opening winning designation command corresponding to the scheduled fluctuation pattern determined in the first preliminary determination process in step S230-8 in the performance transmission data storage area, and The first starting port detection switch input process ends.

As a result, the planned fluctuation pattern can be transmitted to the production control board 130 as a first starting slot winning designation command, and the sub CPU 130a of the production control board 130 that has received the first starting slot winning designation command Analyzes the specified command and performs a predetermined preview effect over one or more variable displays that are executed from before the start of the variable display of the special symbol corresponding to the first starting opening winning designation command. It is possible to execute a look-ahead preview effect that executes. Note that the pre-read preview performance is performed using one or more of the image display device, the audio output device 9, the frame lighting device 10, the movable performance member 73, and the board lighting device 74.

In addition, regarding the second starting opening detection switch input process, the first starting opening detection switch 45a, the first special symbol retention storage area, the first retention memory, the first special symbol retention number (U1), and the first special symbol storage designation. The command, the first advance judgment process, and the first starting opening winning designation command are respectively sent to the second starting opening detection switch 47a, the second special symbol retention storage area, the second retention memory, the second special symbol retention number (U2), and the second special symbol retention storage area. It may be read as the 2 special symbol storage designation command, the 2nd preliminary determination process, and the 2nd starting opening winning designation command.

(Special figure special electric control processing of main control board)
The special figure special electric control process of the main control board 110 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing the special figure special electric control process in the main control board 110.

First, the main CPU 110a loads the special figure special electric line processing data in step S301, refers to the branch destination address from the loaded special figure special electric line processing data in step S302, and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 0, the special figure memory is stored. The process moves to the determination process (step S310), and if the special figure/telephone processing data=1, the process moves to the special symbol variation process (step S320), and if the special figure/telephone processing data=2, the process moves to the special symbol stop process (step S320). If the special figure special electric line processing data = 3, the process moves to the jackpot game process (step S340), and if the special figure special electric line processing data = 4, the process moves to the jackpot game end process (step S350). Move.

This "special figure special electric line processing data" is set as necessary in each subroutine of the special figure special electric control process as described later, so the subroutines necessary for the game will be processed as appropriate. .

In step S310, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol storage determination process that determines a jackpot, determines the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and determines the fluctuation time of the special symbol.

Specifically, first, the main CPU 110a determines whether the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is "1" or more, and if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more. , it is determined whether the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, and if the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is not "1" or more ("0"), It is determined whether or not a customer waiting state determination flag for determining whether or not it is the start of a customer waiting state in which a variable display of special symbols and a jackpot game are not being executed is "0".

When the customer waiting state determination flag is "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has started, and a customer waiting state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area, and the special figure special electric line processing data = 0 is maintained. If the current special symbol memory determination process is finished and the customer waiting state determination flag is not "0", it is assumed that the customer waiting state has already started, and the special symbol special electric line processing data is maintained at 0. The current special symbol memory determination process ends.

If the second special symbol retention number (U2) is "1" or more, "1" is subtracted from the value stored in the second special symbol retention storage area, and then the value is stored in the second special symbol retention storage area. Shift various random numbers (special symbol determination information) stored in a certain first storage section to fourth storage section to the previous storage section, and select the number corresponding to the second special symbol reservation number (U2) after subtraction. 2 Set the special symbol storage designation command in the production transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number value for special symbol determination among various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first memory section to the 0th memory section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" that will lead to the execution of a jackpot game.

On the other hand, if the second special symbol reservation number (U2) is not "1" or more, and the first special symbol reservation number (U1) is "1" or more, the first special symbol reservation storage area is After subtracting "1" from the stored value, shift the various random numbers stored in the first to fourth storage parts in the first special symbol storage area to the previous storage part, A first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the first special symbol reservation number (U1) after the subtraction is set in the presentation transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a jackpot determination to determine whether or not to execute a jackpot game. Specifically, the random number value for special symbol determination among various random number values (special symbol determination information) shifted from the first storage section to the 0th memory section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, and the current probability. Based on the gaming state (low probability gaming state, high probability gaming state), it is determined whether it is a "big hit" or a "loss" that will lead to the execution of a jackpot game.

Then, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol determination process to determine the type of special symbol to be stopped and displayed. Specifically, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section is A jackpot special symbol or a loss special symbol is determined based on the random number value for the jackpot symbol, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the jackpot symbol stored in the 0th storage section A special symbol (big hit special symbol, loss special symbol) is determined based on the random number value, and a performance symbol designation command corresponding to the determined special symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area.

Next, the main CPU 110a performs a special symbol fluctuation pattern determination process for determining a special symbol fluctuation pattern (fluctuation time). Specifically, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the second special symbol reservation storage area, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the 0th storage section is Based on the random number for reach determination and the random number for special symbol variation, determine the variation pattern of the special symbol, set the variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern in the special symbol time counter, and set the variation pattern to the determined variation pattern. Set the corresponding variation pattern designation command in the production transmission data storage area.

In addition, when a jackpot determination is made based on the random number value for special symbol determination stored in the 0th storage section of the first special symbol reservation storage area, the reach determination value stored in the 0th storage section A variation pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number value and the random number value for special symbol variation, a variation time corresponding to the determined variation pattern is set in the special symbol time counter, and a variation pattern corresponding to the determined variation pattern is determined. Sets the specified command in the performance transmission data storage area.

Then, the main CPU 110a sets variable display data in a predetermined processing area for causing the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 to display a variable display of the special symbol (blinking of the LED). .

As a result, when the variable display data is set in a predetermined processing area, data for turning on or off the LED is created as appropriate in step S600, and the created data is output in step S700. A variable display of the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61 is performed.

Then, the special figure special electric line processing data = 0 is set to the special figure special electric line processing data = 1 to prepare for moving to the subroutine of the special symbol variation process, and the current special symbol memory determination process is ended.

In step S320, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol variation processing to determine whether the special symbol variation time has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol variation time set in step S310 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the variation time has not elapsed, the current special symbol variation process is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electricity processing data=1.

If the variable time has elapsed, the special symbol determined in step S310 is caused to stop displaying the jackpot special symbol or the loss special symbol on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. , a predetermined special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) is set in the special symbol time counter. As a result, the player is informed of the determination result of the jackpot determination.

Then, the special symbol/special electrical processing data = 1 is set to the special symbol/special electrical processing data = 2, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the special symbol stop processing, and the current special symbol variation processing is ended.

In step S330, the main CPU 110a performs special symbol stop processing to determine whether the special symbol stop time (0.5 seconds) has elapsed. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the special symbol stop time set in step S320 has elapsed (special symbol time counter=0). If the stop time has not elapsed, the current special symbol stop process is ended while maintaining the special symbol special electric process data=2.

When the stop time has elapsed, if the number of time savers > 0, the time saver counter is decremented by 1 and updated; if the number of time savers = 0, the time saver game flag is cleared; and if the high probability number > 0, the time saver game flag is cleared. The probability count counter is updated by subtracting 1, and when the high probability count becomes 0, the high probability game flag is cleared.

Then, the main CPU 110a determines whether the stopped and displayed special symbol is a jackpot special symbol. If it is a jackpot special symbol, clear the time-saving game flag, high-probability game flag, time-saving number counter, and high-probability number counter, and set the special figure special electric processing data = 2 to special figure special electric processing data = 3. Then, preparations are made to proceed to the jackpot game processing subroutine, and the current special symbol stop processing is ended.

On the other hand, if it is a losing special symbol, the special symbol special electrical processing data = 2 is set to the special symbol special electrical processing data = 0, preparations are made to move to the subroutine of special symbol storage judgment processing, and the current special symbol stop processing is performed. end.

In step S340, the main CPU 110a executes the first jackpot game, the second jackpot game, or the third jackpot game based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stop symbol data) set in step S310. Perform jackpot game processing.

Specifically, the opening time of the opening/closing member 51 corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the special game timer counter, and drive data for the jackpot opening/closing solenoid 51b is output to open the opening/closing member 51. At this time, 1 is added to the round game number (R) storage area.

If a specified number of game balls win (enter) during this opening, or the opening time of the grand prize opening has elapsed (round winning counter (C) = 10, or special game timer counter = 0), The output of the drive data of the winning opening opening/closing solenoid 51b is stopped to close the opening/closing member 51. This completes one round game. Also, the counter value of the round winning counter (C) is cleared.

When a predetermined number of round games (in this embodiment, 4 or 16 times) is completed, the data stored in the round game number (R) storage area is cleared, and the special figure special electric processing data = 3 Then, the special figure special electric processing data is set to 4, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the jackpot game end processing, and the current jackpot game processing is ended.

In step S350, the main CPU 110a determines a probability gaming state, either a high probability gaming state or a low probability gaming state, and also determines a gaming state, a time saving gaming state or a non-time saving gaming state. Perform jackpot game end processing.

Specifically, based on the type of jackpot special symbol (stopped symbol data) set in step S310, a high probability game flag, a high probability number of times, a time saving game flag, and a time saving number of times are set. Then, the special figure/special electric line processing data = 4 is set to the special figure/special electric line processing data = 0, preparations are made to proceed to the subroutine of the special symbol memory determination processing, and the current jackpot game end processing is ended.

(Explanation of commands related to the production control board)
The types of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130 will be explained using FIGS. 8 and 9. 8 and 9 are diagrams showing the types of commands sent from the main control board 110 to the production control board 130.

The "first special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of reserved memories stored in the first special symbol reserved number (U1) storage area, and when "MODE" is set to "E0H", the number of reserved memories is DATA information is set accordingly.

This first special symbol storage designation command is executed in step S230-11 or step S310 when the value stored in the first special symbol reservation number (U1) storage area increases or decreases. The first special symbol storage designation command corresponding to the number is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "2nd special symbol storage designation command" indicates the number of pending memories stored in the 2nd special symbol pending number (U2) storage area, and when "MODE" is set to "E0H", the number of pending memories is DATA information is set accordingly.

This second special symbol storage designation command is executed in step S240 or step S310 when the value stored in the second special symbol reservation number (U2) storage area increases or decreases. A corresponding second special symbol storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In addition, in this embodiment, the "first special symbol storage designation command" and the "second special symbol storage designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "special symbol storage designation command".

The "production design designation command" indicates the type (type) of the special symbol to be stopped and displayed, and if it is the first special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H", and if it is the second special symbol, "MODE" is set to "E1H". " is set as "E2H", and DATA information is set according to the type of special symbol. In addition, since the type of special symbol ultimately determines the type of jackpot and the gaming state after the jackpot ends, the production design designation command can also be said to indicate the jackpot type and the gaming state after the jackpot ends. .

This production design designation command is executed when various special symbols are determined and variable display of the special symbols is started, and the production design designation command corresponding to the special symbol is sent to the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310. is set and transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the first special symbol display 60, and "MODE" is set to "E3H", and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This first special symbol variation pattern designation command is executed when the first special symbol display device 60 starts displaying the special symbol variation in step S310. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" indicates the variation time (variation mode) of the special symbol on the second special symbol display 61, and "MODE" is set to "E4H", and various variations DATA information is set according to the pattern.

This second special symbol variation pattern designation command is executed when the second special symbol display device 61 starts displaying the special symbol variation in step S310. A pattern designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In this embodiment, the "first special symbol variation pattern designation command" and the "second special symbol variation pattern designation command" may be collectively referred to as the "variation pattern designation command."

The "special symbol confirmation command" indicates that the special symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "00H".

This special symbol confirmation command is executed when the special symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 60 or the second special symbol display 61. It is set in the storage area and transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "normal symbol confirmation command" indicates that the normal symbol is stopped and displayed, and "MODE" is set to "E5H" and "DATA" is set to "01H".

This normal symbol confirmation command is sent to the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400 when the normal symbol is stopped and displayed on the normal symbol display 62. is set and transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The “starting opening winning designation command” is information for notifying the performance control board 130 in advance of the result of the jackpot determination (lottery), and if it is based on the winning of a game ball to the first starting opening 45, the “MODE " is set to "E6H", and if it is based on winning of a game ball to the second starting port 47, "MODE" is set to "E7H", and the information of DATA is set according to various winning information. There is.

This starting hole winning designation command is executed when a game ball wins in the first starting hole 45 or the second starting hole 47, in step S230-10 or S240, the starting hole winning designation corresponding to the starting winning information is executed. The command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the effect control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "Jackpot opening specification command" indicates the start of various jackpot games (special game states), and "MODE" is set to "E8H", and the DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game. It is set.

When various jackpot games start, the jackpot opening specification command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S330, and the jackpot opening specification command is set in step S800. It will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process.

The "round designation command" indicates the number of rounds of the jackpot game, "MODE" is set to "E9H", and the information of DATA is set according to the number of rounds of the jackpot game.

When the round game of the jackpot game is started, the round designation command corresponding to the number of rounds is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the output control process in step S800 is performed. It will be transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "jackpot ending designation command" indicates that various jackpot games have ended, and the "MODE" is set to "EAH", and the DATA information is set according to the type of jackpot game.

When various jackpot games end, the jackpot ending specification command corresponding to the type of jackpot game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S340, and the jackpot ending specification command is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and step S800 It will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process.

The "normal symbol memory designation command" indicates the number of reserved symbols stored in the normal symbol reserved number (G1) storage area, and "MODE" is set to "ECH", and the DATA is stored according to the number of reserved symbols. information has been set.

This normal symbol storage designation command is executed in step S250 or step S400 when the value stored in the normal symbol reservation number (G1) storage area increases or decreases the normal symbol corresponding to the number of retained memories after the increase or decrease. A storage designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The “ordinary symbol designation command” indicates the type of the ordinary symbol that is stopped and displayed on the ordinary symbol display 62, and the “MODE” is set to “EDH” and the DATA information is set according to the type of the ordinary symbol. It is set.

This ordinary symbol designation command is executed when various ordinary symbols are determined and the fluctuating display of the ordinary symbols is started. is set and transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "common pattern variation designation command" indicates the variation time of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 62, and "MODE" is set to "EEH", and the DATA information is set according to the variation time of various common symbols. is set.

This ordinary symbol fluctuation designation command is set in step S400 when the ordinary symbol fluctuation display starts, and the ordinary symbol fluctuation designation command corresponding to the fluctuation time of the ordinary symbol is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c. , will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "winning opening designation command" indicates the start of various auxiliary games, and the "MODE" is set to "EFH", and the DATA information is set according to the type of the auxiliary game.

When the auxiliary game is started, the winning opening designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game is set in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S800. It will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process.

The "winning ending designation command" indicates that various auxiliary games have ended, and "MODE" is set to "EFH", and the information of DATA is set according to the type of auxiliary game.

When various auxiliary games end, the winning ending designation command corresponding to the type of auxiliary game is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S400, and the winning ending designation command is It will be transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of S800.

The "gaming state designation command" indicates whether or not it is a time-saving gaming state or not, and whether it is a high probability gaming state, and "MODE" is set to "F0H", and " DATA" is set.

This gaming state designation command sets the gaming state in step S310, step S330, and step S350 at the start of special symbol variation, at the end of special symbol variation (start of jackpot game), and at the end of jackpot. A corresponding gaming state designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

The "power-on designation command" and the "power restoration designation command" indicate whether or not power-on to the gaming machine 1 involves initialization of the main RAM 110c, and when "MODE" is "F1H". "DATA" is set to "00H" when the main RAM 110c is initialized, and "DATA" is set to "01H to 03H" when the main RAM 110c is not initialized.

The power-on designation command and the power restoration designation command are a power-on designation command corresponding to the presence or absence of initialization of the main RAM 110c in step S10 and the gaming state when the gaming machine 1 is powered on; Alternatively, a power recovery designation command is transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "Customer Waiting State Designation Command" indicates that the special symbol is in a customer waiting state where variable display is not performed, and "MODE" is set to "F1H" and DATA is set to "04H". ing.

This customer waiting state designation command is set in the production transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c in step S310 when the special symbol is not displayed in a customer waiting state, and in the output control process of step S800. It will be transmitted to the production control board 130.

The "error designation command" indicates an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1, and the "MODE" is set to "F2H" and the information of "DATA" is set according to the type of error.

This error designation command is used when it is determined that a magnetic abnormality or radio wave abnormality has occurred in the magnetic/radio wave abnormality determination process in step S600, or when it is determined that an abnormal winning has occurred in the winning confirmation detection switch input process in step S260. , When it is determined that an illegal winning has occurred in the big winning opening detection switch input process of step S220 or the second starting opening detection switch input process of step S240, the error specifying command corresponding to the type of error is stored in the main RAM 110c. It is set in the performance transmission data storage area of , and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of step S800.

In addition, when the payout control board 120 detects that the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is open, the lower tray 12 is full, or a payout abnormality is detected, an error designation command corresponding to the type of error is transmitted to the payout RAM 121c for presentation. It will be set in the data storage area and transmitted to the production control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

The "error cancellation designation command" indicates that the error that occurred in the gaming machine 1 has been resolved, and the "MODE" is set to "F2H" and the "DATA" information is set according to the type of error that has been resolved. is set.

This error cancellation designation command is issued to the payout control board 120 when it is detected that the game board mounting frame 3 or the glass frame 4 is closed, the lower tray 12 is no longer full, or the payout abnormality is removed. A corresponding error release designation command is set in the performance transmission data storage area of the main RAM 110c, and is transmitted to the performance control board 130 in the output control process of the payout control board 120.

(Main processing of production control unit 130m)
Next, the main processing of the production control section 130m will be explained using FIG. 10. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the production control section 130m.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the sub CPU 130a, and the sub CPU 130a performs the following main processing.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step E10, and performs initialization processing in step E20. Specifically, when the power is turned on, the main processing program is read from the sub ROM 130b, flags etc. stored in the sub RAM 130c are initialized, and processing such as initial settings is performed.

The sub CPU 130a sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts in step E30, and performs sub random number update processing in step E40. Specifically, processing is performed to update various random numbers stored in the sub-RAM 130c. Thereafter, the process of step E40 is repeated until a predetermined interrupt process is performed.

(Timer interrupt processing of production control unit 130m)
The timer interrupt process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 11. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing executed at predetermined intervals (4 milliseconds) in the production control unit 130m.

The sub CPU 130a saves the information stored in the register of the sub CPU 130a to the stack area in step E100, and performs timer update processing in step E120. In this timer update process, the sub CPU 130a performs a process of updating various timers.

The sub CPU 130a performs input control processing in step E130. Specifically, it is determined whether or not there is an input to various switches such as the performance button detection switch 17a and the cross key detection switch 19a, and when there is an input, processing is performed to set predetermined data.

The sub CPU 130a performs command analysis processing in step E150. Specifically, the process determines whether or not various commands are being transmitted from the main control board 110, and stores the received commands in the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c when various commands are being transmitted. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs power-on processing in step E200. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a power-on designation command has been received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, and if the power-on designation command has been received, processing is performed to notify the power-on. Specifically, a power-on notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power-on screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power-on sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs power failure recovery processing in step E250. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a power restoration designation command has been received, and if the power restoration designation command has been received, a process for notifying power restoration is performed. Specifically, a power recovery notification command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a power recovery screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), For example, the audio output device 9 outputs a power restoration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs customer waiting effect processing in step E300. Specifically, the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c is referred to to determine whether or not a customer waiting state designation command has been received, and if a customer waiting state designation command has been received, the customer waiting effect is executed after a predetermined period of time has elapsed (for example, 20 seconds). Perform the processing to be performed. Specifically, a customer waiting production command is sent to the display/audio control unit 140 to display a customer waiting demonstration screen on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). , the voice output device 9 outputs customer waiting demonstration sound.

The sub CPU 130a performs a gaming state update process in step E350. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether or not a gaming state designation command has been received, and if it has been received, updates the gaming state information stored in the sub-RAM 130c. conduct.

The sub CPU 130a performs pending information update processing in step E400. Specifically, it is determined whether or not a special symbol storage designation command or a normal symbol storage designation command is received by referring to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c. Processing is performed to update the number of reserved 1st special symbols, the number of reserved 2nd special symbols, the number of reserved regular symbols, etc.

The sub CPU 130a performs icon change effect processing in step E500. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, it is determined whether or not a starting opening prize designation command or a variation pattern designation command is received, and if so, processing related to icon change effects is performed.

The icon change effect is a type of advance notice effect that changes the pending icon and the display mode of the icon.The details will be described later, but the timing and change mode (normal change, pattern effect change, character change, etc.) Multiple types of action changes) are set. The details will be described later using FIG. 12.

In this embodiment, an icon change effect for a pending icon may be referred to as a "hold icon change effect" and an icon change effect for the icon may be referred to as "the icon change effect."

The sub CPU 130a performs special figure special electric production processing in step E600. Specifically, with reference to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c, a performance symbol designation command, a special symbol variation pattern designation command, a special symbol confirmation command, a jackpot opening designation command, a round designation command, a jackpot ending designation command, etc. It is determined whether or not the received command is received, and if the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

In step E800, the sub CPU 130a performs a general figure and general electric display process. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c and determines whether or not a normal pattern designation command, a normal pattern fluctuation designation command, a normal pattern confirmation command, a winning opening designation command, a winning ending designation command, etc. If the received command is received, processing is performed to execute the effect corresponding to the received command.

The sub CPU 130a performs error notification processing in step E850. Specifically, it refers to the reception buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to determine whether an error designation command or an error cancellation designation command has been received, and if so, an error notification effect corresponding to the received error designation command is performed. , or terminate the error notification effect corresponding to the received error cancellation designation command.

The sub CPU 130a performs output control processing in step E900. Specifically, it performs processes such as outputting signals such as predetermined data and transmitting various commands stored in the transmission buffer of the sub-RAM 130c to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150. .

In step E950, the sub CPU 130a restores the information saved in step E100 to the register of the sub CPU 130a, and ends the current timer interrupt process.

(Icon change performance processing of the performance control unit 130m)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon change effect determination process to determine whether or not to perform the icon change effect. The details will be described later using FIG. 13.

In step E520, the sub CPU 130a performs an icon display mode update process to update (change) the display mode of the icons that are already displayed (the pending icon and the relevant icon), and ends the current icon change production process. do. The details will be described later using FIG. 16.

(Icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m)
The icon change performance determination process of the performance control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 13. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing icon change performance determination processing in the performance control section 130m.

In step E510-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the starting opening winning designation command has been received. If the starting slot winning designation command is received, the process moves to step E510-2, and if the starting opening winning designation command is not received, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

In step E510-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the received starting opening winning designation command and grasps whether or not it is a jackpot, the type of jackpot game, and the production content (scheduled variation pattern).

In step E510-3, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the current period is an executable period for the icon change effect. If it is the executable period for the icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-4, and if it is not the executable period for the icon change effect, the current icon change effect determination process is ended.

The executable period of the icon change performance is when a jackpot game is not being executed, the icon change performance is not being executed, or the icon change performance is not scheduled to be executed. Note that any one of the above three conditions or only two conditions may be provided. Further, conditions may be different from the above three conditions.

In step E510-4, the sub CPU 130a determines that all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation (the reservation memory corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command received earlier) are below the normal reach, that is, all the preliminary determination results of the advance reservation are normal fluctuations. Determine whether there is shortening variation or normal reach. If all are below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-5, and when all are not below the normal reach, the process moves to step E510-8.

In step E510-5, the sub CPU 130a obtains a random value for determining the icon display mode for determining the final display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), and in step E510-6. , selects the icon final display mode determination table (see FIG. 14) for determining the final display mode of the icon. Note that details of the icon final display mode determination table will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the final icon display mode in step E510-7. Specifically, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. The final display mode of one icon is determined from the following.

In step E510-8, the sub CPU 130a determines the normal icon (CD icon), which is the normal display mode, as the final icon display mode.

In step E510-9, the sub CPU 130a determines whether or not the determined final icon display mode is a display mode (special icon) that executes an icon change effect. If the display mode is such that an icon change effect is executed, the process moves to step E510-10, and if the display mode is not a display mode that executes an icon change effect, the process moves to step E510-13.

In step E510-10, the sub CPU 130a selects a change scenario determination table (see FIG. 15) for determining a change scenario for the icon change effect. Note that details of the change scenario determination table will be described later. This change scenario indicates the transition of the display mode from when the pending icon appears until it disappears.

In step E510-11, the sub CPU 130a determines a change scenario and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c. Specifically, with reference to the change scenario determination table shown in FIG. 15, one change scenario is determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the icon final display mode and the selection rate.

In step E510-12, the sub CPU 130a identifies the winning icon, which is the icon display mode initially displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), from the determined change scenario, and displays the icon of the winning icon. The display command is set in the transmission buffer, and the current icon change effect determination process is ended. As a result, the icon display command is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the pending icon of the display mode corresponding to the icon display command of the winning icon is displayed as the first icon. This will be displayed on the image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In step E510-13, the sub CPU 130a determines a non-change scenario in which the icon change effect is not executed, and sets it in the prefetch information storage area corresponding to the pending storage number counter of the sub RAM 130c.

In step E510-14, the sub CPU 130a sets the icon display command for the normal icon in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon change effect determination process. As a result, the display data is sent to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the reserved icon in the display mode corresponding to the icon display command for the normal icon is displayed as the first image. This will be displayed on the device 70 (main liquid crystal) and a predetermined sound effect will be output.

In addition, in the icon change effect determination process of this embodiment, the icon change effect (the pending icon change effect, the icon change effect) is executed when all preliminary determination results of advance hold are below the normal reach. The icon change performance may be executed when the preliminary determination result of advance suspension is that the ready-to-win performance is not performed, and the icon change performance may not be performed when the ready-to-reach performance is performed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon will not change during the variable performance corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is executed, and the hold icon will not change during the variable effect corresponding to the advance hold in which the reach effect is not executed. A change in the display mode will now occur, and the icon change performance will no longer impede the reach performance, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the preliminary determination result of advance hold includes one that performs a reach effect, the icon change effect may be executed; If there is no icon change effect, the icon change effect may be executed more easily (performed at a higher rate) than if it includes one that performs a reach effect.

(Icon final display mode determination table)
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an icon final display mode determination table that is referred to when determining the icon final display mode.

The icon final display mode determination table associates the type of starting opening winning designation command, the random value for determining the icon display mode, and the final icon display mode to be selected, and the selection rate (%) shown in FIG. 14 A random number value for determining the icon display mode is assigned so that the icon display mode is determined.

The final icon display mode includes a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character as special icons that indicate the possibility of a jackpot (a jackpot game will be executed). An icon has been set.

The jackpot winning expectation for special icons is higher in the order of (CD icon <) blue character icon < red character icon < rainbow character icon, and the rainbow character icon is an icon that is guaranteed to be a jackpot. .

Here, the main feature of the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14 is that the selection rate of the icon final display mode is varied depending on the presentation content. Specifically, in this embodiment, when the production content is specific starting winning information indicating SP reach or SPSP reach, it is determined that the production content is normal fluctuation, shortened variation, or normal reach that does not correspond to reach. The character icon is selected at a higher rate than when the normal starting winning information is shown.

Note that in the icon final display mode determination table shown in FIG. 14, the CD icon is not selected as the icon final display mode in the case of a jackpot, but it may be selected.

(Change scenario determination table)
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a change scenario determination table that is referred to when determining a change scenario.

The change scenario determination table associates the final icon display mode, the number of reserved special symbols corresponding to the starting opening winning designation command, the selection rate (%) of each scenario, and the type of change scenario to be selected. , For reference, the preliminary changes in each change scenario and the update mode for the changes are described.

Here, "prior variation" refers to a variation display (variation effect) that is executed based on special figure judgment information stored earlier than the special figure judgment information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command. That is, "the said variation" is a variation display (variation performance) executed based on the special figure determination information corresponding to the newly received starting opening winning designation command.

In the change scenario, the display mode of the icon does not change during the execution of the preliminary change (the pending icon change effect is not executed), but changes during the execution of the change (the icon change effect is executed). The scenario (for example, scenario 01, etc.) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the preliminary variation (the pending icon change effect is executed), but does not change during the execution of the variation (the icon change effect is Scenarios (for example, Scenario 02, etc.) that are not executed) or the display mode of the icon changes during the execution of the pre-variation and during the execution of the variation (pending icon change production and the icon change production are executed) ) scenario (for example, scenario 15, etc.) is set.

In addition, in the change scenario determination table of this embodiment, a scenario is determined in which the display mode of the icon is changed regardless of whether or not a reach effect (a reach other than a normal reach may be performed) is executed in advance variation. However, the display mode of the icon is changed by a change scenario determination table that uses as a determining factor whether or not a reach effect that suggests that a jackpot game may be executed in advance variation is executed. Alternatively, the scenario in which the When using such a change scenario determination table, the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed, and the icon display mode does not change during the pre-variation in which the reach effect is executed. It is advisable to set various scenarios so that changes in the display mode occur. In addition, the display mode of the icon changes during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed, and the pre-variation in which a reach effect is not executed, but the reach effect is lower than during the pre-variation in which a reach effect is executed. Various scenarios may be set in such a way that changes in the display mode of the icon occur at a higher rate during the execution of the pre-variation in which the change is not executed.

(Icon display mode update process of production control unit 130m)
The icon display mode update process of the production control unit 130m will be explained using FIG. 16. FIG. 16 is a flowchart showing the icon display mode update process in the production control section 130m.

In step E520-1, the sub CPU 130a determines whether a variation pattern designation command has been received. If the variation pattern designation command has been received, the process moves to step E520-2, and if the variation pattern designation command has not been received, the current icon display mode update process is ended.

In step E520-2, the sub CPU 130a refers to the icon change scenario stored in the prefetch information storage area of the sub RAM 130c, and in step E520-3, determines whether there is a pending icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). Determine whether If there is a pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-4, and if there is no pending icon that changes the display mode, the process moves to step E520-7.

In step E520-4, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern determination table for hold icons (see FIG. 17) for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the hold icon to be changed. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for pending icons will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines a pending icon change pattern in step E520-5. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for pending icons shown in FIG. 17, one of the multiple pending icon change patterns is selected based on the mode of pending icon change in the current variation performance and the selection rate (%). One pending icon change pattern is determined from the following.

In step E520-6, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined pending icon change pattern in the transmission buffer. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control section 140 and the lamp/drive control section 150, and the change timing according to the hold icon change pattern and the change stage in the change timing are The display mode of the hold icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

In step E520-7, the sub CPU 130a determines whether there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed (updated). If there is an icon whose display mode is to be changed, the process moves to step E520-8, and if there is no icon whose display mode is to be changed, the current icon display mode update process is ended.

In step E520-8, the sub CPU 130a selects a change pattern for the current variation effect from among a plurality of change pattern determination tables for the icon for determining a change pattern (change mode) of the display mode of the icon to be changed. A change pattern determination table (see FIGS. 18 and 19) for the icon corresponding to the change stage at which the icon changes is selected. Note that details of the change pattern determination table for the icon according to the change stage will be described later.

The sub CPU 130a determines the icon change pattern in step E520-9. Specifically, with reference to the change pattern determination table for the icon shown in FIG. 18 or 19, multiple corresponding One icon change pattern is determined from among the icon change patterns.

In step E520-10, the sub CPU 130a sets a change effect command corresponding to the determined icon change pattern in the transmission buffer, and ends the current icon display mode update process. As a result, the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150 in the output control process of step E900, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and the display data is transmitted to the display/audio control unit 140 and the lamp/drive control unit 150, and The display mode of the icon displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) changes, or a predetermined sound effect is output.

(Change pattern determination table for pending icon)
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a change pattern determination table for hold icons that is referred to when determining a change pattern for hold icons.

The pending icon change pattern determination table is associated with the pending icon change mode in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each pending icon change pattern, and the type of selected pending icon change pattern. For reference, the timing of occurrence of a pending icon change effect and the change stage in each pending icon change pattern are described.

The hold icon change pattern includes normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the hold icon changes with the output of a sound effect when the hold icon is shifted and displayed (at the start of variation) in response to the icon disappearing. , normal change pattern 02 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes while changing with the output of a sound effect, and the display of the icon as a character appears and an action effect that acts on the icon from the character as a starting point is performed. The character action change pattern 01 in which the aspect changes, and the change notification pattern (special pattern) indicating that the display condition of the icon changes as a result of the fluctuation effect, are temporarily stopped and displayed, and the change notification pattern is used as a starting point to act on the pending icon. A symbol effect change pattern 01 is set in which an effect effect is performed and the display mode of the pending icon changes.

The timing at which the pending icon change effect occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the variable effect: when the variable effect starts (at the start of the change), when the change effect is being executed (during change), and when the change effect occurs during the change effect. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The change stage of the pending icon includes 1UP where the jackpot winning expectation level changes to a display mode one level higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a jackpot change. 2UP (for example, change from CD icon to red character icon) is set to change the display mode to a level two levels higher in the winning expectation level.

Note that, although the change effect generation timing of the pending icon is set to the above three timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Change pattern determination table for the icon)
18 and 19 are diagrams showing change pattern determination tables for the icon that are referred to when determining the change pattern of the icon, and FIG. 18 shows the change pattern determination table for the icon that changes the display mode of the icon by one step. FIG. 19 is a table that is referred to when changing the display mode of the icon in two steps.

The change pattern determination table for the icon is associated with the mode of the icon change in the current variation performance, the selection rate (%) of each icon change pattern, and the type of the icon change pattern to be selected. For reference, the timing at which the icon change effect occurs and the change stage in each icon change pattern are listed.

The icon change patterns include normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes at the start of the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect, and normal change pattern 01 in which the display mode of the pending icon changes during the variation accompanied by the output of a sound effect. A change pattern 02 and a character effect change pattern 01 are set in which a character appears and an action effect is performed that acts on the icon starting from the character and the display mode of the icon changes.

The timing at which the change effect of the icon occurs is classified in relation to the progress state of the change effect, and is classified as when the change effect is started (at the start of change), during the execution of the change effect (during change), and when the change effect is in progress. There are times when the 70a temporarily stops ((temporarily) stopped).

The icon change stage includes 1UP, where the jackpot winning expectation level changes to a display mode one level higher (for example, a change from a CD icon to a blue character icon, a change from a blue character icon to a red character icon), and a jackpot change. 2UP is set to change the display mode to a display mode two levels higher in winning expectation (for example, change from a CD icon to a red character icon, or from a blue character icon to a rainbow character icon).

In addition, in the change pattern determination table for the icon of this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not selected, but may be selected. For example, in a fluctuating performance that performs a pseudo-continuous performance, when the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a before the pseudo-variation is performed, the change notification symbol may be temporarily stopped and displayed.

Pseudo-continuous performance is a system in which fluctuating display of performance symbols is performed multiple times in response to a jackpot determination based on winning (ball landing) in one starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47). In order to make it appear as if the game was played, all performances will be performed within the special drawing fluctuation time determined for each winning (ball entering) into the starting hole (first starting hole 45, second starting hole 47). This is a special form of fluctuating display of performance symbols in which a re-fluctuation display in which the symbols 70a temporarily stop and then start fluctuating again is performed once or multiple times.

In addition, although the change effect generation timing of the said icon was set to the above-mentioned two timings, it is not limited to these timings, and other timings may be provided. For example, it may be provided that a variable performance is being executed (during variation) until a reach is established, a normal reach is being executed, an SP (SPSP) reach is being executed, etc.

(Relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the timing of occurrence of change effects and the frequency of occurrence of change effects)
FIG. 20(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the display mode of the pending icon and the timing of generation of change effects.

When the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. ing.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a blue character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting lower.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of a predetermined command, the icon change effect is better than when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. It can be said that the display mode of the icon changes easily to a blue character icon.

On the other hand, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command than at the frame update timing in response to the reception of the predetermined command. It's getting expensive.

In addition, when the display mode of the pending icon changes to a red character icon, the change effect occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to receiving a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command. It's getting lower.

In other words, when the icon change effect is executed at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the icon change effect is better than when the icon change effect is executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the predetermined command. It can be said that the display mode of the icon changes easily to a red character icon. In addition, this predetermined command is a starting opening prize designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command.

Specifically, the change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command is when a game ball enters the starting port (first starting port 45, second starting port 47) and a pending icon is displayed. These are a change effect (change effect at the time of prize winning) in which a pending icon is displayed as a special icon at the timing when the change is made, and a normal change pattern 01.
Further, the change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command are normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01.

Since the relationship between the pending icon display mode and the change effect generation frequency is as described above, the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern specification command is better than the predetermined command. Since the change effect that changes to a red character icon with a higher expectation of winning a jackpot occurs more frequently than the frame update timing in response to the reception of the change effect, it is possible to draw the player's attention to the change effect occurrence timing, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, since the change effect that changes to a blue character icon occurs more frequently at the frame update timing in response to receiving a predetermined command than at the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, the change effect in which the character icon changes to blue occurs more frequently, so the change effect occurs earlier. In addition, although it is difficult to change to a red character icon, which has a high expectation of winning a jackpot, it is easy to change to a blue character icon, so it is possible to draw the player's attention to the subsequent fluctuating performance, and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Relationship between change performance type and change performance occurrence timing and change performance occurrence frequency 1)
FIG. 20(b) is a diagram showing the relationship 1 between the change effect type and the change effect occurrence timing and the change effect occurrence frequency.

When a change effect occurs at a frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command, the change effect occurrence frequency is higher for the pending icon change effect than for the icon change effect.

Further, when a change effect occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is lower for the icon change effect than for the pending icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance type and the change performance occurrence frequency is as described above, the hold icon is more likely to change at the early stage of the change performance, so the game It is possible to keep people's expectations for a jackpot game for a long period of time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, this predetermined command is a starting opening prize designation command or a fluctuation pattern designation command.

(Relationship between change performance type and change performance occurrence timing and change performance occurrence frequency 2)
FIG. 20(c) is a diagram showing the relationship 2 of the frequency of occurrence of change effects between the type of change effects and the timing of occurrence of change effects.

When a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command, the frequency of occurrence of the change effect is higher for the icon change effect than for the pending icon change effect.

Furthermore, when a change effect occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after reception of the change pattern designation command, the change effect occurrence frequency of the pending icon change effect is lower than that of the icon change effect.

Since the relationship between the change performance type and the change performance generation frequency is as described above, the icon is more likely to change during the late period of the change performance, so the game It is possible to improve the interest of the game by keeping the player's expectations for the jackpot game until the late period of the variable performance.

(Relationship between icon display mode and notification sound when icon occurs (changes))
FIG. 20(d) is a diagram showing the relationship between the icon display mode and the notification sound when the icon occurs (changes).

When a CD icon is generated as a hold icon, the first generated notification sound is output as the notification sound when the icon is generated, and when a hold icon and a blue character icon are generated (changed to) as the icon, A second generation notification sound (change notification sound) is output as a notification sound when an icon occurs (changes), and when a red character icon is generated (changed to) as a pending icon or the relevant icon, an icon generation (change) is output. When the icon changes to a rainbow character icon, the fourth notification sound (change notification sound) is output as the notification sound when the icon changes. is set to be output.

In this embodiment, different notification sounds are set for each of the plurality of icon display modes (4 types), but the notification sound when a CD icon is generated, the blue character icon, and the red character icon are different. , and a change notification sound when the icon changes to a rainbow character icon.Alternatively, the notification sound is not output when the CD icon occurs, and the notification sound is output only when the icon changes to one of the modes. It may also be output. Further, for the rainbow character icon that is certain to be a jackpot, a dedicated change notification sound may be provided and there may be three types.

(Main processing of the overall control unit 141)
The main processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 21. FIG. 21 is a flowchart showing the main processing of the overall control unit 141.

When power supply voltage is supplied from the power supply board 160, a system reset occurs in the central CPU 142, and the central CPU 142 performs the following main processing.

First, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt prohibition to prohibit timer interrupts in step T1, and performs initialization processing in step T2. Specifically, it reads the main processing program from the general ROM 143, initializes flags, etc. stored in the general RAM 144, and performs processing such as initial settings.

In step T3, the supervising CPU 142 sets interrupt permission to permit timer interrupts, and in step T4, refers to the reception buffer of the supervising RAM 144 to determine whether or not a production instruction command has been received from the production control unit 130m. If it has not been received, the process moves to step T7, and if it has been received, in step T5, an animation pattern is determined and set from the type of animation group corresponding to the received production instruction command. Performs animation pattern setting processing.

Note that the performance instruction commands include a customer waiting performance command, an icon display command, a changing performance command, a variable performance pattern command, a symbol stop pattern command, an opening performance pattern command, a round performance pattern command, an ending performance pattern command, and the like.

An animation group also includes the types of objects that make up the effect image, the scene (timing) and wait frame (display time) in which the effect image is displayed, target data (sprite image identification number, transfer source address, etc.), One or more animation patterns whose information specifies (specifies) parameters (sprite image display position, transfer destination address, etc.), drawing method, information specifying the image display device for displaying the effect image, etc. are bundled. It is a group formed by

The types of animation groups include, for example, a production pattern group for displaying the animation of the production pattern 70a, an icon group for displaying a pending icon or animation of the icon, and a production pattern group for displaying a variable production animation such as a background or a character. Examples include a variable performance group, a preview performance group for displaying animations such as previews, and a special game performance group for displaying animations of special game performances.

In step T6, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound setting process to determine and set a sound pattern from the type of sound group corresponding to the received production instruction command, and in step T7, updates the production image to be displayed on the image display device. It is determined whether there is a frame switching flag indicating that it is frame update timing (to draw a new effect image), and if there is no frame switching flag, the process moves to step T4, and the frame switching flag is If so, the frame switching flag is cleared in step T8.

In step T9, the supervising CPU 142 generates a display list made up of a group of drawing control commands, and performs display list generation/output processing to output the generated display list to the image control unit 145 (VDP).

Here, the display list is image shaping information for molding the effect image to be displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) and the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal), and includes 1 unit, Alternatively, it is generated for each frame of multiple units (frame update timing), and in this embodiment, the display list is generated for each frame.

Specifically, since the animation scene information (address) is updated for each set animation pattern in the animation control process described later, drawing control commands are set according to the contents of the animation scene information for each set animation pattern. A display list for one frame corresponding to the current number of frames is generated. Note that the drawing control commands are set in order from the anime pattern of the lowest priority anime group to the anime pattern of the highest priority anime group according to the priority order (drawing order) set for the anime group to which each anime pattern belongs. However, the reverse is also possible.

In step T10, the supervising CPU 142 performs drawing command processing to instruct the image control unit 145 (VDP) to draw an effect image based on the output display list. By performing this drawing command processing, the image control unit 145 (VDP) draws the effect image based on the display list on the drawing frame buffer, and transfers the effect image drawn on the display frame buffer to the first image display device. 70 (main liquid crystal) and a second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal).

In step T11, the supervising CPU 142 generates a sound list composed of a group of sound control commands, and performs a sound list generation/output process of outputting the generated sound list to the audio control unit 148.

Here, the sound list is audio output information for specifying sounds (BGM, sound effects, etc.) such as audio data and music data to be output from the audio output device 9, and is used when outputting new sounds. It is generated based on the drawing frame.

In step T12, the supervising CPU 142 performs a sound output command process to instruct the audio control unit 148 to output a sound based on the output sound list. By performing this sound output command processing, the audio control unit 148 causes the audio output device 9 to output a sound based on the sound list.

Therefore, the output of various sounds from the audio output device 9 is started in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing by the image control unit 145 (VDP), and also in synchronization (synchronization) with the frame update timing. Output from the audio output device 9 is ended.

Note that although the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds in synchronization with the frame update timing, the audio output device 9 starts outputting various sounds so as not to synchronize with the frame update timing. may be stopped, or vice versa.

In step T13, the supervising CPU 142 performs animation control processing to update animation scene information (address) for each set animation pattern in preparation for creating a display list for the next frame, and then performs processing in step T4. Thereafter, the processes from step T4 to step T13 are repeated in a loop.

(Command reception interrupt processing of overall control unit 141)
The command reception interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a flowchart showing the command reception interruption process of the overall control unit 141, and the command reception interruption process is executed by receiving the performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m.

In step T20, the overall CPU 142 performs a command reception process to receive the production instruction command transmitted from the production control unit 130m. Specifically, a process is performed to store the performance instruction command transmitted from the performance control unit 130m in the reception buffer of the general RAM 144, and the current command reception interrupt process is ended.

(V blank interrupt processing of overall control unit 141)
The V blank interrupt processing of the overall control unit 141 will be explained using FIG. 23. FIG. 23 is a flowchart showing the V blank interrupt processing of the general control unit 141. This is executed every time a V blank signal is received (1/30 second = approximately 33 ms), which is transmitted every 1/30 second (approximately 33 ms).

In step T30, the supervising CPU 142 performs a counter update process of updating various counters (scene switching counter, wait frame counter, frame counter, etc.) by a predetermined number (for example, adding "1"), and in step T31, the image control unit 145 ( A frame buffer switching command process is performed to instruct the VDP (VDP) to switch between the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area of the VRAM 147.

As a result, each time the V blank interrupt processing is executed every 1/30 seconds (approximately 33 ms), the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area are converted into a "drawing frame buffer" and a "display frame buffer". It will alternate between.

In step T32, the supervising CPU 142 sets a frame switching flag indicating that the drawing (display) frame has been switched, and ends the current V blank interrupt process. Since this frame switching flag is referred to in step T7, the processes in steps T8 to T13 are executed every time the V blank interrupt process is executed (frame update timing).

(Timing chart of change performance when winning a prize)
24 and 25 are timing charts showing various timings when the display mode of the first reservation icon is displayed (changed to) as a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

The timing of T1 is the 280th frame after the start of the fluctuation performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 280th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, based on the game ball winning in the first starting opening 45, a starting opening winning designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the performance control unit 130m.

The timing of T3 is the 281st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it has been decided that the first pending icon will be displayed as a blue character icon when winning a prize, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9. output is not started either.

Also, at timing T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 282nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data c that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command.

The timing T5 is the 283rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn to the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. Ru.

The timing of T6 is the 284th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data e that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. Ru.

The timing T7 is the 296th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the 297th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second occurrence notification sound that has been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped. In addition, drawing of image data i (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image display device of the image data h that had been drawn to the first frame buffer The image display device starts displaying the normal variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display).

The timing T9 is the 298th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data i that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, whereas the output of the second occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed, the blue character icon is erased and the second occurrence notification sound is output. Since this is done at a different frame update timing than when the blue character icon is stopped, the output of the second occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of change performance when winning a prize)
FIG. 26 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the first reservation icon is displayed (changed to) as a blue character icon when a game ball enters the first starting port 45.

As shown in FIG. 26(a), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner in a state where the first pending icon and the second pending icon are not displayed, that is, in a state where no pending memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

Here, based on the fact that the game ball has won in the first starting hole 45, a starting hole winning designation command is sent from the main control board 110 to the production control section 130m, and an icon change production determination process is executed, and as a change scenario. It is assumed that "Scenario 02" (displaying the first pending icon as a blue character icon when winning a prize) is determined.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 26(b), in response to the game ball winning in the first starting port 45, the first holding icon (blue character Icon) H11 is displayed, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the combination (here, "234") indicating that it is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that was previously displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 26(d), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 26(e), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 26(f), the "3" effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

Although not shown, BGM, sound effects, etc. are output from the audio output device 9 during the variable performance. The same applies to subsequent FIGS. 29, 32, 33, 36, and 37.

(Timing chart of normal change pattern 01)
27 and 28 are timings showing various timings when the normal change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the blue character icon in the icon display mode update process. It is a chart.

The timing T1 is the 600th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period in which the performance symbols 70a are stopped and displayed. At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the stop effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is a timing in the middle of the 600th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, a variation pattern designation command is transmitted from the main control board 110 to the production control section 130m.

The timing of T3 is the 601st frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol stop period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the normal change pattern 01 that changes the first pending icon to a blue character icon, but the blue character icon is not displayed on the image display device, and the second signal is generated from the audio output device 9. The output of the notification sound also does not start.

Also, at timing T3, drawing of image data c (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data b on the image display device is started, and the image display device enters a state in which the stop effect display screen b is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the timing of the first frame after the start of the next variable effect (timing at which the variable effect is started). At this timing, drawing of the image data d (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data c that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen c (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T4 corresponds to the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command.

The timing T5 is the second frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data d drawn to the first frame buffer is The display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .

The timing T6 is the third frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of the image data e that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen d (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued. .

The timing T7 is the 15th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data h (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image of the image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the display device is started, the normal variation effect display screen g (blue character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the output of the second occurrence notification sound from the audio output device 9 is continued.

The timing of T8 is the 16th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the second occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data i (background image, variable effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, etc.), the image data h drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device normally displays a variable effect display screen h (blue character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T9 is the 17th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data i that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen i (blue character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the second occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with (in synchronization with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the blue character icon and the output of the second occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, whereas the output of the second occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing when the blue character icon is displayed, the blue character icon is erased and the second occurrence notification sound is output. Since this is done at a different frame update timing than when the blue character icon is stopped, the output of the second occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the blue character icon, making it possible to improve the interest of the game. becomes.

(Example of production of normal change pattern 01)
FIG. 29 is a diagram showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the first hold icon is changed to a blue character icon at the start of variation (at the time of shift) (normal change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 29(a), when the first pending icons (CD icons) H11 and H12 are displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2 of the first pending icon display area 70B, , it is assumed that a stop display of a performance symbol indicating a loss is performed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(b), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed on the first display section 70B1 and the second display section 70B2. H11 and H12 are shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C and the first display section 70B1, respectively.

Here, when the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 displayed on the second display section 70B2 is shifted and displayed on the first display section 70B1, the display mode is changed to a blue character icon. Furthermore, the CD icon is displayed changing to a blue character icon, and the second occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(c), the effect pattern 70a that has been displayed in a variable manner is stopped and displayed in the combination (here, "164") indicating that it is a loss, and is displayed in the icon display area 70C. The icon (CD icon) TH that was previously displayed is deleted.

Next, as shown in FIG. 29(d), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (blue character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 29(e), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, as shown in FIG. 29(f), the "3" effect symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in the central variable display area, thereby ending the ready-to-win effect and ending the variable display. Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (blue character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of character action change pattern 01)
30 and 31 are timings showing various timings when character effect change pattern 01 is determined as the icon change pattern in the icon display mode update process and the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon. It is a chart.

The timing of T1 is the first frame timing after the start of the fluctuation performance (the timing at which the fluctuation performance is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing T2 is the 61st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the production control unit 130m has decided to execute the character effect change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the icon TH to a red character icon, but the character etc. is not displayed on the image display device and the sound The output of the third occurrence notification sound from the output device 9 is also not started.

Also, at timing T2, drawing of image data d (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing to the first frame buffer is started. Display of the image data c that had been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variation effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing T3 is the 62nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data e (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data d on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen d (character display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound is not output from the audio output device 9. Will not start.

The timing T4 is the 63rd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of the image data f (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. The display of the data e on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen e (character display) is displayed, but the audio output device 9 does not output the third occurrence notification sound. will continue.

The timing T5 is the 64th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, character images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display of the data f on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen f (character display) is displayed, but the audio output device 9 does not output the third occurrence notification sound. will continue.

The timing T6 is the 91st frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data g that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the image display device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen g (character display) is displayed, but the non-output of the third generation notification sound from the audio output device 9 continues. Ru.

The timing T7 is the 92nd frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data h that had been drawn to the first frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device is started, the normal variable effect display screen h (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9. . The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing T8 is the 106th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the audio output device 9 continues to output the third occurrence notification sound, and the image data j (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) is drawn to the first frame buffer. is started, the image data i drawn in the second frame buffer is started to be displayed on the image display device, and the normal variable effect display screen i (red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device. Become.

The timing T9 is the 107th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, variable effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, etc.), the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the image display device normally displays a variable effect display screen j (red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 108th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data k that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where the normal variable effect display screen k (red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, while the output of the third occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound Since this is done at a frame update timing that is different from when the output is stopped, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the red character icon, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Example of production of character action change pattern 01)
FIGS. 32 and 33 are diagrams showing an example of a performance when the display mode of the icon TH is changed to a red character icon during a variable performance (character action change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 32(a), the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are not displayed, that is, when no hold memory is stored. A normal variation effect is being executed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 32(c), after the character C1 is displayed (see FIG. 32(b)), the character C1 performs a blowing kiss motion and points the heart H toward the icon (CD icon) TH. There will be a performance of people flying.

Then, when the heart H hits the icon TH, as shown in FIG. is output for 0.5 seconds.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33(a), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reaches reach, as shown in FIG. 33(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the performance symbol 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 33(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a jackpot, and the fluctuating performance symbol 70a is a combination indicating a jackpot ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 33(d), the effect pattern 70a returns to its original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

(Timing chart of symbol effect change pattern 01)
34 and 35 show various timings when the symbol effect change pattern 01 is determined as the pending icon change pattern and the display mode of the first pending icon is changed to the red character icon in the icon display mode update process. This is a timing chart.

The timing of T1 is the first frame timing after the start of the fluctuation performance (the timing at which the fluctuation performance is started), and is the frame update timing at the start of the normal fluctuation period in which the normal fluctuation of the performance symbol 70a is performed. . At this timing, drawing of image data b (background images, various variable effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the drawing of image data a to the second frame buffer is started. Display on the image display device starts, and the image display device enters a state in which the normal variable effect display screen a is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 299th frame after the start of the fluctuation effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the normal fluctuation period. At this timing, it has been decided to execute the character action change pattern 01 that changes the display mode of the first pending icon to a red character icon, but no change symbol is displayed on the image display device, and the audio output device 9 The output of the third occurrence notification sound is also not started.

Also, at timing T2, drawing of image data d (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and drawing is started to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data c that had been displayed on the image display device is started, and the normal variable effect display screen c is displayed on the image display device.

The timing of T3 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing of the temporary stop period of the design during which the temporary stop display of the performance symbol 70a is performed. At this timing, drawing of image data e (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data e was drawn to the second frame buffer. The image data d starts to be displayed on the image display device, and the temporary stop effect display screen d (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound is not output from the audio output device 9. No output is started.

The timing of T4 is the 301st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data f (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer was started, and the image data was being drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data e on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen e (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is No output continues.

The timing of T5 is the 302nd frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data g (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data g was drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data f on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen f (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is No output continues.

The timing of T6 is the 330th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data h (background images, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer was started, and the image data h was being drawn to the second frame buffer. The display of the image data g on the image display device starts, and the temporary stop effect display screen g (changing symbol display) is displayed on the image display device, but the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 No output continues.

The timing of T7 is the 331st frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data i (background image, various stop effect images, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the second frame buffer is started, and the image data i is drawn to the first frame buffer. The display of the image data h on the image display device is started, and the temporary stop effect display screen h (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third occurrence notification is issued from the audio output device 9. Sound output begins. The timing of T7 corresponds to the predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command.

The timing of T8 is the 345th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the frame update timing in the middle of the symbol temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data j (background image, stop performance image, various pattern images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and the image that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is The display of data i on the image display device is started, the temporary stop effect display screen i (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed on the image display device, and the third generation notification sound of the audio output device 9 is displayed. continues to be output.

The timing of T9 is the 346th frame after the start of the variable effect, and is the timing in the middle of the pattern temporary stop period. At this timing, the output of the third occurrence notification sound that had been output for about 0.5 seconds (15 frames) is stopped, and the image data k (background image, stop effect image, various symbols) is transferred to the second frame buffer. images, various icon images, changing pattern images, etc.), the image data j drawn in the first frame buffer starts to be displayed on the image display device, and a temporary stop effect display screen is displayed on the image display device. j (changing pattern & red character icon display) is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 347th frame after the start of the variable performance, and is the timing in the middle of the pattern temporary stop period. At this timing, drawing of image data l (background image, variable effect image, various pattern images, various icon images, etc.) to the first frame buffer is started, and image display of image data k that had been drawn to the second frame buffer is started. The display on the device is started, and the image display device is in a state where a temporary stop effect display screen k (changing symbol & red character icon display) is displayed.

In this way, the output of the third occurrence notification sound is started from the audio output device 9 in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Compared to the case where the frame update timing between the display of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound is shifted, it is possible to reduce the discomfort felt by the player and improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, while the output of the third occurrence notification sound started in synchronization with the frame update timing when the red character icon is displayed, the deletion of the red character icon and the output of the third occurrence notification sound Since this is done at a frame update timing that is different from when the output is stopped, the output of the third occurrence notification sound can be stopped without being constrained by the timing of erasing the red character icon, which can improve the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

(Example of production of pattern effect change pattern 01)
FIGS. 36 and 37 are diagrams showing an example of the effect when the display mode of the pending icon is changed to a red character icon while the effect pattern 70a is stopped (temporarily stopped) (symbol effect change pattern 01).

As shown in FIG. 36(a), in a state where the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1 of the first pending icon display area 70B, the normal variation in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner The performance is being performed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 35(b), the effect pattern 70a of "2" in the left variable display area, "3" in the right variable display area, and "change" in the center variable display area is displayed (temporarily). (stop display), a lightning-like effect appears from the change symbol stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the central variable display area toward the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1, When a hit occurs, the display mode of the first hold icon H11 changes from a CD icon to a red character icon, and a third occurrence notification sound is output from the audio output device 9 for 0.5 seconds.

Next, as shown in FIG. 36(c), the variable display of the effect pattern 70a is started, and the first pending icon (red character icon) H11 of the first display section 70B1 is shifted and displayed in the icon display area 70C. be done.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37(a), while the effect pattern 70a of "2" is stopped (temporarily stopped) displayed in the left and right variable display areas of the effect pattern 70a that was being displayed in a variable manner, the center variable display area is A reach effect is executed in which the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner.

Then, when the SP reaches, as shown in FIG. 37(b), an effect in which the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 confront each other is started. In addition, when it develops into SP reach, the effect pattern 70a is reduced and displayed at the upper left, and the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are erased.

After that, as shown in FIG. 37(c), the ally character C2 wins over the enemy character C3, suggesting a jackpot, and the fluctuating performance symbol 70a is a combination indicating a jackpot ( Here, the display is stopped at "222").

Then, as shown in FIG. 37(d), the effect pattern 70a returns to its original size from the reduced display and is stopped and displayed at the center of the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal). Here, since the variable display has ended, the icon (red character icon) TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is deleted.

As described above, in the present embodiment, there are two cases in which the effect control unit 130m executes a change effect at a frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command (starting slot winning designation command or variation pattern designation command); Since the performance control unit 130m may execute the change performance at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command, it is possible to improve the interest of the game by increasing the variations of the change performance. Become.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is such that the final display mode and scenario are determined when the effect control unit 130m receives the starting opening prize designation command, but the final display mode and scenario are not limited to this method of determination. . For example, each time it is possible to change the display mode of an icon (the icon, the pending icon), it may be determined whether or not to change the display mode. In addition, only the final display mode is determined when the production control unit 130m receives the starting entrance prize designation command, and how it changes is determined by the timing at which the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) can be changed. If so, it may be determined each time.

In addition, in this embodiment, there are four display modes of the icon (the icon, the hold icon): a CD icon as a normal icon, a blue character icon, a red character icon, and a rainbow character icon as special icons. However, the number of types is not limited to four, and there may be more or fewer types.

For example, a special icon (blinking CD icon) may be provided that indicates that the expectation of winning a jackpot is lower than that of the blue character icon and that there is a possibility of changing to a special icon. When providing such a special icon, the expectation of winning a jackpot is lower than that of a blue character icon, so normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and symbol action change pattern 01 (after receiving the fluctuation pattern designation command) It is desirable to prevent the icon from changing to a special icon (change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing). By doing this, the normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01 (predetermined frame update timing after receiving the change pattern designation command This eliminates the possibility of the icon changing into a special icon due to the change effect that occurs in the game, so it is possible to prevent the player from being disappointed, and it is possible to increase the variation in the display mode of the icon, which improves the interest of the game. It becomes possible.

Further, in addition to the four types of this embodiment, the above-mentioned special icon and green character icon may be provided. In this case, the expectation of winning a jackpot for the icons (the icon, the pending icon) is in the following order: (CD icon <) Flashing CD icon < Blue character icon < Green character icon < Red character icon < Rainbow character icon Just make sure it is high.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, in the character action change pattern 01 or the symbol action change pattern 01, if the character C1 or the change symbol is displayed, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is always changed. However, a case may be provided in which the character C1 or the changing pattern is not changed even if it is displayed (so-called fake effect). When providing such a false effect, the false effect for the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) The execution rate is higher than that of the winning change effect and the fake effect for normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command), or normal change pattern 02, character action change. It is desirable that only fake effects can be executed for pattern 01 and symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command).

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect is not executed multiple times during one variation effect, but it may be executed multiple times. In this case, the winning change effect and the normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command) occur only once during the variable effect, so the normal change Pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command) may be executed multiple times. By doing so, the display mode of the icon (the icon, the pending icon) may change multiple times in one variable performance, so it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, the execution timing of the change effect (change effect at the time of winning and normal change pattern 01) that occurs at the frame update timing in response to the reception of a predetermined command is determined by the predetermined command (starting opening winning designation). The frame update timing was set to be two frames after the number of frames received (command or fluctuation pattern specification command), but it is not limited to two frames, and can be updated several frames after receiving a predetermined command as long as it is not extremely late. It can be done after the frame.

Further, in this embodiment, the symbol effect change pattern 01 is not provided as the icon change pattern, but it may be provided.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when executing the "normal change pattern 01", the change effect is executed at the frame update timing according to the reception of the change pattern designation command, but the change effect is not limited to this timing. The changing effect may be executed at the frame update timing corresponding to the reception of the symbol storage designation command or the performance design designation command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when executing "normal change pattern 02", "character effect change pattern 01", and "symbol effect change pattern 01", at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command. Although the change effect is executed, the change effect is not limited to this timing, and the change effect may be executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving another predetermined command.

In addition, in this embodiment, when an icon (the icon, the hold icon) changes, an icon generation (change) notification sound is output as an effect to notify that the icon (the icon, the hold icon) has changed. However, in addition to outputting the icon occurrence (change) notification sound, the board lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10 are used to display the changed icon (the icon, the pending The lamp may be made to emit light in the same color as the display mode of the icon). In this case, in the same way as the icon generation (change) notification sound is output, the frame update timing at which the changed icon (the icon, the pending icon) is displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal) The lamps of the panel lighting device 74 and/or the frame lighting device 10 may start emitting light at the same time (synchronized), and the timing of ending the light emission of the lamps may be such that the light emission of the lamps ends after a predetermined period of time has elapsed. Alternatively, the process may be terminated in synchronization with (synchronized with) the frame update timing at which the icon (the icon, the pending icon) is erased.

Further, in the present embodiment, the icon and the pending icon are displayed on the first image display device 70 (main liquid crystal), but they are now displayed on the second image display device 71 (sub liquid crystal). Good too.

Further, in the present embodiment, the execution of the icon change effect is not limited depending on the gaming state, but the execution of the icon change effect may be limited depending on the gaming state. For example, in the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state, the winning change performance and the normal change pattern 01 (change performance that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command) can be executed. However, the normal change pattern 02, the character effect change pattern 01, and the symbol effect change pattern 01 (change effects that occur at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving the variation pattern designation command) may not be executable. By doing this, since the first specific game state and the second specific game state have a short variation time, the normal change pattern 02, character action change pattern 01, and , by restricting the execution of symbol effect change pattern 01 (a change effect that occurs at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a variation pattern designation command), the gameplay of the first specific gaming state and the second specific gaming state can be improved. It becomes possible to improve the interest of the game without spoiling it.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the icon change effect changes the display mode (shape and color) of the pending icon or the icon itself, but is not limited to such changes. Without changing the appearance (the CD icon remains the same), a color effect indicating the expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed around the pending icon or the icon, or around (near) the pending icon or the icon. A character indicating the level of expectation of winning a jackpot may be displayed, or a pending icon or a character image (nearby) indicating the performance scheduled to be performed (such as "SP" or "pseudo-ren") may be displayed. may be displayed.

Further, in the present embodiment, when determining a change scenario, the change scenario is determined regardless of whether a jackpot is won or not, but the change scenario may be determined by referring to a jackpot. Specifically, one change scenario may be determined from among a plurality of change scenarios based on the final icon display mode, the current number of reservations, the jackpot win or loss, and the selection rate (%). .

In this way, when determining the change scenario by referring to jackpot wins and losses, if you have won a jackpot and the character icon changes to red, it will be more likely that the change scenario will be changed than when the current pending number is "1" or "2". 3" or "4", the selection rate (%) may be set so that the change scenario that changes to a red character icon when winning a prize is more likely to be selected.
In other words, if you have won a jackpot and the icon changes to a red character icon, it is better to have the red character icon when you win the prize when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". This can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which a change scenario that changes to an icon is less likely to be selected.
In addition, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are a loser and the character icon changes to red, the change scenario in which the icon changes to red at the time of winning is better than the case where the icon changes to red when you win the jackpot. What is necessary is to set the selection rate (%) so that it is difficult to select.

In addition, in this embodiment, when determining the hold icon change pattern, it is determined regardless of the current number of holds or whether the jackpot is won or lost, but the change pattern is determined by referring to the current number of holds or whether the jackpot is won or lost. It's okay. Specifically, one pending icon will be selected from among multiple pending icon change patterns based on the mode of pending icon change in this fluctuating performance, the current number of pending items, jackpot win/loss, and selection rate (%). What is necessary is to determine the change pattern.

In this way, when determining the pending icon change pattern by referring to the current pending number and jackpot wins and losses, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the current pending number is "1" or " The selection rate (%) may be set so that the "normal change pattern 01" is more likely to be selected as the pending icon change pattern when the icon is "3" or "4" than when the icon is "2".
In other words, if you win a jackpot and change to a red character icon, the pending icon change pattern is better when the current pending number is "1" or "2" than when it is "3" or "4". This can also be said to be the selection rate (%) at which "normal change pattern 01" is difficult to be selected.
In addition, if you have not won the jackpot, that is, if you are a loser and the character icon changes to red, the pending icon change pattern is "Normal change pattern 01" than if you have won the jackpot and the icon changes to red. ” should be set to a selection rate (%) that makes it difficult for the selection rate to be selected.

As mentioned above, when the character icon changes to red in the winning change effect and normal change pattern 01 (change effect that occurs at the frame update timing in response to reception of a predetermined command), the current pending number is "1". Since the expectation of winning a jackpot is higher when the number is ``3'' or ``4'' than when the number is ``2'' or ``2'', it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

(Second embodiment)
Hereinafter, a second embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings. Here, description of the same parts as in the first embodiment will be omitted, and different parts will be described.

In the second embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 39(a), a special symbol TZ is displayed in the lower right corner of the display section of the first image display device 70 in a manner that corresponds to the variable display of the special symbol. This embodiment differs from the first embodiment in that a special symbol display area is provided for display.

Further, at the left end of the display section of the first image display device 70, there is a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying a first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1), and a first reservation number display area 70E for displaying the first reservation number indicating the current first special symbol reservation number (U1). This embodiment is also different from the first embodiment in that a second reservation number display area 70F for displaying a second reservation number indicating the number of reserved 2 special symbols (U2) is provided.

Note that the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F correspond to the first pending information, and the first pending number display area 70E corresponds to the first pending number display area 70E. The first hold icon displayed in 70B and the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 70D correspond to second hold information, and the icon displayed in the icon display area 70C corresponds to execution information. corresponds to

(Specific example when variable performance starts from customer waiting state)
A specific example of when a variable effect is started from a customer waiting state will be explained using FIGS. 38 to 40. FIG. 38 is a timing chart in which the variable performance is started from the customer waiting state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to.

First, the timing T0 is the 0th frame after the start of the customer waiting state. At this timing, subtraction of the waiting time (30 seconds) for starting the customer waiting demonstration performance is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(a), on the first image display device 70, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are in a stopped display state. Further, "0" is displayed in the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F, and the pending icon and the icon TH are not displayed.

The timing of T1 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (4th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the first pending digit is displayed with a non-animated increase, and the first pending icon is displayed with a non-animated increase (completed in one frame), and the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is performed. starts outputting.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in normal size on the first display section 70B1. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol pending number (U1) decreases from "1" to "0" and the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variable pattern starts (start of customer waiting state). 5th frame). At this timing, a variable display of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ, a non-animated decreasing display of the first pending number, and an animated change display (decreasing display) of the first pending icon to the corresponding icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "0". At the same time, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll.

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the output of the first notification sound starts (the 14th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 continues to be moved (shifted) to the icon display area 70C, and the effect is The reduced display of the symbol 70a continues.

The timing of T4 is the 20th frame after the change display (decreasing display) of the first hold icon starts (the 25th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the changing display of the first pending icon ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(e), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and When the icon becomes TH, the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a stops.

The timing of T5 is the 40th frame after the start of the variable effect (45th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 39(f), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the center variable display Scroll (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started.

The timing of T6 is the 50th frame after the start of the variable effect (55th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(g), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the center variable display area, the right variable display Scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the area is started, and the effect pattern 70a is in a scrolling state in all the variable display areas.

The timing of T7 is the 225th frame after the start of the variable effect (230th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(h), in the first image display device 70, the "3" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the left variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the center and right side variable display areas.

The timing of T8 is the 255th frame after the start of the variable effect (260th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(i), in the first image display device 70, the "5" effect pattern 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the right-side variable display area, and The effect pattern 70a continues to scroll in the central variable display area.

The timing of T9 is the 285th frame after the start of the variable effect (290th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(j), in the first image display device 70, the "6" effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped (in a swinging state) in the central variable display area, and the result is a loss. A state is reached in which a combination of effect patterns 70a indicating a certain thing is displayed.

The timing of T10 is the 300th frame after the start of the variable effect (305th frame from the start of the customer waiting state). At this timing, the variable display of the performance symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 40(k), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is displayed as a effect. It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "365" as the symbol 70a. Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, when the number of special symbols on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, the non-animated increase in the number and icon on hold will be displayed for the shortest period of one frame. Since the game ends in a period (time), it is possible to immediately shift to a variable performance (decreasing display of pending numbers and changing display of pending icons) without delay, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon will continue until the (frame update) timing after the timing (frame update) when the increasing display of the pending digits and the pending icon ends. Since the game is continued, the player can be sure to recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when the number of special symbols on hold decreases (changes from "1" to "0"), the number on hold is displayed as a non-animated decrease, and the pending icon changes to the corresponding icon using animation. Therefore, the player can be made to reliably recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, since the timing at which the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed (frame update), the special symbol is pending. While presenting the change in the number, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next effect symbol) starts, it becomes easier to understand the progress of the game, in which the variable effect starts after the pending memory decreases, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. Become.

In addition, when the number of special symbols on hold increases (changes from "0" to "1") while waiting for a customer, instead of displaying an increase in the number of pending icons without animation, The animation may be executed over multiple frames (for example, 5 frames) so as to continue for a long time. By doing so, it becomes easier for the player to understand the increase in the number of reserved special symbols, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the display of a decrease in the pending number and the display of the change of the pending icon to the corresponding icon (decrease display) at the same timing (frame update), the display of the decrease in the pending number is completed (frame update). You can start either one first, if it's faster. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has decreased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the scrolling of the effect symbols (updating to the next effect symbol) at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed than usual), the change display of the pending icon is It may be possible to start scrolling (updating to the next effect pattern) of the effect pattern at a timing slightly before completion (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during variable performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a variable performance will be explained using FIGS. 41 and 42. FIG. 41 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a variable performance, and FIGS. 42(a) to 42(c) are diagrams showing performance examples corresponding to (a) to (c) in FIG. 41.

First, the timing T1 is the 50th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the normal variation pattern. At this timing, the variable display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are scrolled (moved downward). Moreover, "0" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E and the second reservation number display area 70F, and the corresponding icon (CD icon) TH is displayed.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "0" to "1" (60th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, non-animated increasing display of the first pending number and animated increasing display of the first pending icon are started, and output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "0" to "1". At the same time, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed in an extremely small size on the first display section 70B1, and enlarged display is started. Further, the audio output device 9 outputs a first occurrence notification sound (picot).

The timing of T3 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (70th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 42(c), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed.

In this way, when the number of special symbols on hold increases, the number on hold is displayed non-animated, and the number on hold is displayed as an animation. This makes it possible to make the game more interesting.

Also, since the timing at which the increase in the number of pending numbers is completed (frame update) is earlier than the timing at which the increase in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update), the number of special symbols pending changes. While presenting this effect, it becomes easier for the player to understand that the number of reserved special symbols has increased due to the reserved numbers, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a variable performance, the increased display of the pending icon will be executed for a longer period of time compared to the case where the number of special symbols on hold increases while waiting for a customer. Therefore, the player can be made to reliably recognize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the generated notification sound that is output in synchronization with the start of the increasing display of pending numbers and pending icons ends in synchronization with the timing at which the increasing display of pending icons ends (frame update), so the number of special symbols pending is It is possible to effectively display the increased number of players, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons (10 frames) is shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons (20 frames), so it is easy to know that the variable effect will start. This makes it possible to enhance the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of starting the increasing display of the pending digits and the increasing display of the pending icon at the same timing (frame update), if the timing for the increasing display of the pending digits to complete (frame updating) is earlier, which one? may be started first. By doing so, it is possible to grasp at an early stage that the number of reserved special symbols has increased while improving the degree of freedom in display control, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, the period for displaying an increasing number of pending icons may be made longer. By doing so, it is possible to emphasize that the number of reserved special symbols has increased, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

Furthermore, instead of making the period for displaying an increase in the number of pending icons shorter than the period for displaying a change in the number of pending icons, both periods may be made to have the same length.

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing will be explained using FIGS. 43 and 44. FIG. 43 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases immediately after decreasing, and FIGS. 44(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 43.

First, the timing T0 is the fifth frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed. At this timing, the stop display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(a), on the first image display device 70, the performance symbols 70a of "4", "6", "8" indicating a loss and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a stopped state. ing. Further, "2" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, a first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2, and the icon TH is not displayed. It is in a state.

The timing of T1 is the timing at which the variable performance (variable display of special symbols) based on the normal variation pattern is started (the 20th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the first pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the first pending icon changes to the corresponding icon through animation, and the first pending icon is decreased due to animation. Display starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "2" to "1". . Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 displayed on the first display section 70B1 starts to move (shift) toward the icon display area 70C, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 that was displayed on the second display section 70B2 1 hold icon (CD icon) H12 starts moving (shifting) toward the first display section 70B1. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ begins to scroll.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (30th frame after the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number starts, but since the first pending icon is changing and decreasing, displaying an increasing number of the first pending icon and notifying when the icon occurs The output of the occurrence notification sound is put on standby.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(c), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the reduced display of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 20th frame after the change display and the decrease display of the first pending icon start (the 40th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the change display and decrease display of the first pending icon end. Further, the animation of the first pending icon that has been on standby starts to be displayed in increasing numbers, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound, which is the notification sound when the icon is generated, is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending icon H11 that has been moved from the first display section 70B1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C, and At the same time as the icon TH, the first pending icon H12 that has moved from the second display section 70B2 is located at the center of the first display section 70B1, and the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a stops. Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in an extremely small size on the second display section 70B2 and starts to be enlarged, and at the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (picot) from the audio output device 9 is started. Ru.

The timing of T4 is the 5th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (45th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the first hold icon continues to be displayed in increasing numbers and the first occurrence notification sound continues to be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(e), in the first image display device 70, the first hold icon (CD icon) H13 is displayed in a small size on the second display section 70B2, and the enlarged display continues. At the same time, the output of the first occurrence notification sound (pico) from the audio output device 9 continues. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area is started.

The timing of T5 is the 10th frame after the start of increasing display of the first pending icon (50th frame after the effect pattern 70a is stopped and displayed). At this timing, the increasing display of the first hold icon ends, and the output of the first occurrence notification sound ends.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44(f), in the first image display device 70, the enlarged display of the first pending icon (CD icon) displayed on the first display section 70B1 is finished, and the first pending icon (CD icon) is displayed in the normal size. Is displayed. Further, scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a in the central variable display area is started.

In this way, if the number of special symbols on hold increases while displaying a change in the pending icon to the corresponding icon and displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, this change display and decrease display will be completed (frame update) Since the display of an increase in the number of pending numbers starts even before the timing, the player can be made aware that the number of special symbols pending has increased even while the pending icon is changing and displaying a decrease. , it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases while displaying a change in the number of pending icons to the relevant icon or displaying a decrease in the number of pending icons, the display of increased number of pending icons and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby (limited). The number of pending icons increases and the output of the occurrence notification sound starts at the timing when the display of changes and decreases in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update), which prevents it from becoming difficult to understand the change in the number of pending special symbols. This makes it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, instead of outputting the occurrence notification sound in synchronization with the increase display of the hold icon that is executed after the increase display of the hold number, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the increase display of the hold number. Good too.

In addition, instead of starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons and outputting the notification sound at the timing when the display of change and display of a decrease in the number of pending icons is completed (frame update) (the start is delayed compared to normal), the change in the pending icon is changed. The display of an increasing number of pending icons and the output of the occurrence notification sound may be started at a timing (frame update) slightly before the display and the display of a decrease are completed (frame update). By doing so, it is possible to prevent the transition of the number of reserved special symbols from becoming difficult to grasp, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols on hold increases while the number of held icons is increasing, the display of the number of held icons will increase and the output of the occurrence notification sound will be on standby (limited) in the same way as when the number of held icons is changing or decreasing. ), on the other hand, it is sufficient to start displaying an increasing number of pending digits, and to start displaying an increasing number of pending icons and outputting an occurrence notification sound at the timing when displaying an increasing number of pending icons is completed (frame update).

(Specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach performance)
A specific example when the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect will be explained using FIGS. 45 and 46. FIG. 45 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases during a specific reach effect, and FIGS. 46(a) to (f) are diagrams showing examples of effects corresponding to (a) to (f) in FIG. 45. .

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the start of the variation effect based on the SP reach variation pattern. At this timing, the normal reach effect executed before the SP reach effect and the variable display of the special symbol TZ continue.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(a), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" is temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas, and the effect symbol 70a is temporarily stopped in the center variable display area. The variable display of 70a continues. Further, "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "0" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. Further, a first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the icon (CD icon) TH is also displayed.

The timing of T2 is the 90th frame from the start of the normal reach effect (430th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is started.

Specifically, in the first image display device 70, the "7" effect pattern 70a temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and the effect pattern 70a scrolling in the center variable display area move toward the upper left of the screen. Starts moving and reducing the display.

The timing of T3 is the 15th frame after the start of the development effect (the 445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the development performance for developing into the SP reach performance is continuing.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(b), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "7" temporarily stopped in the left and right variable display areas and scrolled in the center variable display area. The effect pattern 70a that is displayed is displayed at a position close to the upper left of the screen, and is also displayed in a smaller size than the normal size.

The timing of T4 is the 30th frame after the start of the development effect (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, while the development performance ends, the SP reach performance starts.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a in the variable display area at the center right of the left is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and at the center of the screen. A confrontation performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 confront each other begins. In addition, the pending icons (here, (only the first hold icon) is hidden together with the hold icon display area. Furthermore, the special symbol TZ becomes a ready-to-reach state with the same “7” symbol as the performance symbol 70a.

The timing of T5 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (820th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the non-animated increasing display of the first pending number starts, but since the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) is being executed, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the icon generation are performed at this timing. The generated notification sound, which is the notification sound, will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(d), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the final performance of the confrontation performance (a decisive performance to notify whether or not it is a jackpot) is being executed.

The timing of T6 is the 420th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (880th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result of the final performance (decisive performance) of the confrontation performance is derived.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(e), on the first image display device 70, an effect is performed in which the ally character C2 wins against the enemy character C3, and the effect pattern 70a that is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen is displayed. The game will temporarily stop (it will be in a swaying state) at the combination ("777") that indicates a jackpot.

The timing of T7 is the 450th frame after the start of the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) (910th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the SP reach effect (confrontation effect) ends, and the first pending icon is displayed as a non-animated return display and an increased display.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 46(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that had been displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen is enlarged and displayed in the center of the screen and temporarily stopped (in a swaying state). become). Further, the first hold icon (CD icon) H11 is redisplayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first hold icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed in normal size on the second display section 70B2.

Finally, the effect pattern 70a which has been temporarily stopped in the left center right variable display area is stopped and displayed, and the special pattern TZ is stopped and displayed in the same combination as the effect pattern 70a, "777". Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

In this way, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), even before the timing when this specific performance ends (frame update), the number of pending numbers will increase. Since the increase display starts, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific effect (SP reach effect), the execution of the increase display of the pending icon is waited (restricted), and the specific effect ends (reduced display is displayed). Since the number of pending icons starts to be increased at the timing when the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol is enlarged (frame updated), it is possible to prevent the change in the number of special symbols pending from becoming difficult to grasp, improving the interest of the game. It becomes possible to do so.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific production (SP reach production) ends, the number of pending icons is increased by non-animation that is completed in one frame, so the timing when the number of special symbols pending increases Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons and the timing of displaying an increased number of pending icons, it is possible to reduce the player's sense of discomfort and improve the interest of the game.

In addition, when starting to display an increase in the number of pending icons at the timing when a specific performance (SP reach performance) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the number of special symbols on hold increases at the timing when the specific performance ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult for players to misunderstand that they have played the game, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of special symbols on hold increases multiple times during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), while the number of pending numbers increases, the system waits for the number of pending icons to increase (restriction). It is preferable to display the increased number of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific effect is finished (frame update).

Also, if the number of special symbols on hold increases during the execution of a specific performance (SP reach performance), instead of not outputting the occurrence notification sound, the occurrence notification sound is output in synchronization with the display of the increase in the number on hold. Good too.

Moreover, although the SP reach-to-reach performance has been illustrated as the specific performance, the specific performance may include the SPSP reach-to-reach performance or may include the full-rotation reach-to-reach performance.

(Specific example of when the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state)
A specific example in which the number of reservations increases or decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state will be explained using FIGS. 47 to 49. FIG. 47 is a timing chart in which the number of reservations increases and decreases before and after the end of a specific gaming state, and FIGS. It is a figure which shows the example of a performance corresponding to i).

First, the timing T1 is the 400th frame after the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state is started. At this timing, the variable display of the production pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(a), "1" is displayed in the first reservation number display area 70E, and "4" is displayed in the second reservation number display area 70F. In addition, the first pending icon display area 70B is erased, and second pending icons (CD icons) H21 to H24 are displayed in the first display section 70D1 to fourth display section 70D4 of the second pending icon display area 70D, respectively. and the icon TH is displayed. Furthermore, at the top of the screen, the number of variable effects that can be performed in a specific game state (here, "0 times remaining") is displayed, and at the top right of the screen, the game ball is displayed toward the right area of the game area 5a. A right-handed image MU is displayed that encourages firing.

The timing of T2 is the timing when the first special symbol reservation number (U1) increases from "1" to "2" (415th frame after the start of the variable performance). At this timing, non-animated increasing display of the first pending number is started, but since the first pending icon display area 70B has been erased, the increasing display of the first pending icon and the notification sound when the icon is generated are not displayed. The occurrence notification sound will not be output.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(b), in the first image display device 70, the first pending number displayed in the first pending number display area 70E changes from "1" to "2". At the same time, the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a continues.

The timing of T3 is the 430th frame after the start of the variable effect. At this timing, the performance symbols 70a that have been variably displayed in the left-center-right variable display area temporarily stop at the same time.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(c), in the first image display device 70, the effect symbol 70a of "285" is temporarily stopped (in a swaying state) in the variable display area at the center left, and A state is reached in which a combination of performance symbols 70a indicating a loss is displayed.

The timing of T4 is the 15th frame after the effect pattern 70a temporarily stops (445th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, a result display that shows the results of the game in a predetermined advantageous period (while the jackpot game and the specific game state continue) is started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(d), in the first image display device 70, the background image HG becomes dark, and "Special Time End" indicating the end of the specific gaming state and during a predetermined advantageous period are displayed. The number of jackpot games played "Jackpot x 1" is displayed. In addition, the temporarily stopped production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen.

The timing of T5 is the 15th frame after the start of the result display (460th frame after the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the result display continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(e), the first image display device 70 displays the words "TOTAL 1200pt" indicating the number of game balls acquired (paid out) during a predetermined advantageous period. Additional information will be displayed.

The timing of T6 is the 30th frame after the start of the result display (475th frame from the start of the variable effect). At this timing, the variable display of the production symbol 70a and the variable display of the special symbol TZ end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 48(f), in the first image display device 70, the effect pattern 70a that was temporarily stopped at the upper left of the screen moves to the center of the screen and is stopped, and the special pattern TZ It is stopped and displayed at the same combination "285" as the production pattern 70a. Furthermore, the icon TH displayed in the icon display area 70C is erased.

The timing of T7 is the timing when the last (100th) variable performance in the specific gaming state ends and the first variable performance in the normal gaming state starts (490th frame from the start of the variable performance). At this timing, the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ are displayed in a variable manner, the second pending number is displayed as a non-animated decrease, the second pending icon changes to the corresponding icon through animation, the second pending icon is displayed as an animated decrease, The non-animated return display of the first pending icon and the non-animated increased display of the first pending icon are started.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(g), in the first image display device 70, the second pending number displayed in the second pending number display area 70F changes from "4" to "3". At the same time, the second hold icon (CD icon) H21 displayed on the first display section 70D1 starts moving (shifting) toward the icon display area 70C, and the second display section 70D2 to fourth display section 70D4 The second hold icons (CD icons) H22 to H24 that were being displayed start moving (shifting) toward the next display section.

In addition, the first pending icon display area returns and the first pending icon (CD icon) H11 is restored and displayed on the first display section 70B1, and the first pending icon (CD icon) H12 is displayed on the second display section 70B2. Displayed in normal size. Further, the performance symbol 70a starts to be displayed in a reduced size without being scrolled (updated to another performance symbol), and the special symbol TZ starts to scroll. Further, a left-handed hitting image HU is displayed at the upper left of the screen, which prompts the user to shoot the game ball toward the left side area of the game area 5a.

The timing of T8 is the 20th frame after the start of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (510th frame from the start of the previous variation effect). At this timing, the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon end.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(h), in the first image display device 70, the second pending icon H21 that has moved from the first display section 70D1 is located at the center of the icon display area 70C and At the same time as the icon TH, the second pending icons H22 to H24 that have been moved from the second display section 70D2 to the fourth display section 70D4 are located at the center of the adjacent display section, and the reduced display of the performance symbol 70a stops.

The timing of T9 is the 10th frame after the end of the change display and the decrease display of the second pending icon (520th frame from the start of the previous fluctuating effect). At this timing, the scrolling (downward movement) of the effect pattern 70a continues.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 49(i), in the first image display device 70, following the scrolling of the effect pattern 70a in the left variable display area, the effect pattern 70a is scrolled in the center variable display area. Scrolling (downward movement) is started.

In this way, when the first special symbol pending number (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, while waiting (restricting) the display of an increasing number of first pending icons, the system starts displaying an increasing number of first pending numbers. Therefore, the player can be made aware that the number of reserved special symbols has increased even during execution of a specific performance, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, if the number of first special symbols pending (U1) increases during a specific gaming state, the number of first pending icons will be increased and displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update). Even if you miss the increase display of the first reserved number that was executed before, you can recognize that the first special symbol reserved number has increased, which improves the interest of the game. becomes possible.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of first pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, special symbol pending is displayed in order to display an increasing number of pending icons using non-animation that can be completed in one frame. Even if there is an extreme lag between the timing at which the number increases and the timing at which the display of an increased number of pending icons is executed, the player's sense of discomfort can be reduced and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, when starting to display an increasing number of pending icons at the timing when a specific gaming state (the last variable effect) ends, the occurrence notification sound is not output, so the special symbol will be displayed at the timing when the specific gaming state ends due to the occurrence notification sound. This makes it difficult to mislead people into thinking that the number of reservations has increased, making it possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, until the change display of the pending icon to the corresponding icon is completed, the effect pattern will not scroll (not updated to the next effect pattern), and the effect pattern will be changed at the timing when the change display of the pending icon is completed (frame update). Since the scrolling (updating to the next performance symbol) is started, it becomes easier to grasp the progress of the performance during the variable performance, and it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, even if the number of first special symbols on hold increases by multiple numbers during a specific gaming state, while displaying an increase in the number of pending numbers, the display of an increase in the number of pending icons is on standby (restricted). It is sufficient to display an increase in the amount of pending icons in one frame at the timing when the specific game state (the last variable effect) ends (frame update).

Furthermore, when the number of first special symbols on hold increases during a specific gaming state, the generation notification sound may be outputted in synchronization with the display of an increase in the number on hold instead of not outputting the generation notification sound.

In addition, in this embodiment, in the normal gaming state, the first pending icon display area 70B and the second pending icon display area 70D are set (displayed), but the second pending icon display area 70D is set (displayed). Instead, only the first pending icon display area 70B may be set (displayed).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, the icon display area 70C is set (displayed) regardless of whether or not a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) is executed during the variable performance. However, the icon may be hidden without setting (displaying) the icon display area 70C during the execution of a specific performance, or the icon display area 70C may not be set (displayed) during the execution of the specific performance. The icon may be hidden.

Further, in the present embodiment, the first pending number display area 70E and the second pending number display area 70F are set (displayed) on the first image display device 70, but they are set (displayed) on the second image display device 71. It may be set (displayed) on a dedicated display (for example, a 7-segment LED, a dot matrix, a dedicated LED, etc.) that is different from the image display device. When setting it to a dedicated LED, it is preferable to display the number of special symbols reserved by the lighting color and lighting/blinking mode of the LED.

(Third embodiment)
The third embodiment of the present invention will be specifically described below with reference to FIGS. 50-1 to 56-2. Here, the explanation of the same parts as in the second embodiment will be omitted, and the different parts will be explained.

[Explanation of transition from first display mode to second display mode]
Using FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, first, changes in the display mode of the effect pattern 70a and the special pattern TZ displayed on the first image display device 70 in the third embodiment will be explained. FIG. 50-1 is a diagram illustrating a change in display mode when displayed in a normal reach mode in the first display mode. FIG. 50-2 is a diagram illustrating changes in the display mode when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. FIG. 50-3 is a diagram illustrating a change in display mode when displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode.

As shown in these FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, the display mode of the performance symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ in the third embodiment changes from the first display mode to the second display mode. The first display mode means that at least two of the performance symbol rows 70a composed of three performance symbol rows are stopped, one performance symbol row that is not stopped is displayed in a fluctuating manner, and three This is a display mode in which at least two of the special symbol TZ consisting of two symbol rows are stopped and one symbol row that is not stopped is displayed in a variable manner. Therefore, in the first display mode, in the performance pattern 70a, the performance pattern is not visible in at least one of the three performance pattern rows, that is, it is an unrecognizable display mode. Further, in the special symbol TZ, at least one of the three symbol arrays is in a display mode in which the symbol array is unrecognizable. On the other hand, in the second display mode, all three effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a stop, and all three pattern lines of the special pattern TZ also stop, and all effect pattern lines and pattern lines are visible. , that is, a recognizable mode of display.

As shown in FIG. 50-1(a), when displayed in the normal reach mode as the first display mode, for example, two effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are stopped and displayed with the same effect pattern such as "7". , One production symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, and the two symbol columns of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed at the symbol “7” corresponding to the production symbol “7”, and one symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. are doing. Next, as one mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the mode of normal reach, for example, as shown in FIG. The one performance symbol row that was being displayed is stopped and displayed with a different performance symbol, such as “3”, from the performance symbol of the performance symbol row that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, and is displayed in a special reach-loss suggesting mode. Among the symbols TZ, there are symbols that are stopped and displayed in a reach-missing suggestive manner consisting of a symbol that corresponds to the effect symbol 70a that is being stopped and displayed. In addition, as another mode of the second display mode after being displayed in the normal reach mode, for example, in the production pattern 70a, as shown in FIG. One performance symbol row is displayed in a jackpot suggesting mode such as "7", which is stopped and displayed with the same performance symbol as the performance symbol of the performance symbol row that was stopped and displayed in the first display mode, and the special symbol TZ There is also a game that is stopped and displayed in a jackpot suggesting mode consisting of symbols corresponding to the effect pattern 70a that is being stopped and displayed.

As shown in FIG. 50-2(a), in the first display mode when the SP reach effect is executed, for example, two effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are stopped and displayed with the same effect pattern such as "7". , One production symbol row is displayed in a variable manner, and the two symbol columns of the special symbol TZ are also stopped and displayed at the symbol “7” corresponding to the production symbol “7”, and one symbol column is displayed in a variable manner. are doing. Next, as shown in FIG. 50-2(b), a battle effect, which is an SP reach effect in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 face off, starts, and the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the top left of the screen. . Then, as shown in FIG. 50-2(c), when the ally character C2 is defeated in the battle performance, as one aspect of the second display mode, as shown in FIG. 50-2(d), for example, The effect pattern 70a returns to its original size and is stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests a loss in the reach, and some special symbols TZ are also stopped and displayed in a manner that suggests a loss in the reach. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 50-2(e), when the ally character C2 wins in the battle performance, as another aspect of the second display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. 50-2(f), The production pattern 70a returns to its original size and is stopped and displayed in a jackpot suggesting manner, and some of the special symbols TZ are also stopped and displayed in a jackpot suggesting manner. In addition, in FIGS. 50-2(c) and 50-2(e), although the three effect pattern rows in the effect pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state and all the effect patterns are recognizable, at least one of the special patterns TZ This is a display mode in which two symbol rows are displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this embodiment, the display time of FIG. 50-2(c) is 2 seconds, and the display time of FIG. 50-2(e) is 3 seconds.

As shown in FIG. 50-3(a), when displayed in a non-reach mode as the first display mode, the two effect pattern rows of the effect pattern 70a are different from each other such as "7" and "1". The production pattern is stopped and displayed, one production pattern row is displayed in a variable manner, and the two pattern rows of the special pattern TZ are also stopped and displayed with the symbols corresponding to the production patterns "7" and "1" that are stopped and displayed, One symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. Then, as one aspect of the second display mode after being displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode, for example, as shown in FIG. The one performance symbol row that was in the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode where it is stopped and displayed with a different performance symbol, such as "2", which is different from the two production symbols in the production symbol row that were stopped and displayed in the first display mode. In addition, some special symbols TZ are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-missing manner.

[Explanation of fluctuating end suggestion effect]
Next, the variation end suggestion effect will be explained using FIGS. 51-1 and 51-2. FIG. 51-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a variation end suggestion effect, and FIG. 51-2 is a diagram illustrating another example of a variation end suggestion effect. The variation end suggestion production is a production executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, the variation end suggestion production is a production executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and especially the second display mode where the variation of the production symbol 70a and the special symbol TZ ends. This is a performance that indicates the end of this fluctuation by being executed immediately before. In this fluctuating end suggestion performance, in the performance pattern 70a, all the performance symbols can be recognized because three performance symbol rows are displayed in a stopped state, but in the special symbol TZ, at least one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. There is. Note that the variation end suggestion effect is not necessarily executed between the first display mode and the second display mode, and may be changed to the second display mode without being executed after the first display mode.

As shown in FIG. 51-1, one specific example of the variation end suggestion effect is, for example, executing a predetermined behavior such that each of the effect symbols of the effect image 70a that is being stopped and displayed vibrates. There are various aspects. The fluctuating display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1(a) is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or when the SP reach effect is executed, and is displayed in the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. For example, the transition is as shown in Figure 50-1 (a) → Figure 51-1 (a) → Figure 50-1 (b), or Figure 50-2 (c) → It can be executed when there is a transition from FIG. 51-1(a) to FIG. 50-2(d). Furthermore, the fluctuating display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1(b) is when the normal reach effect is displayed in the first display mode or when the SP reach effect is executed, and the jackpot suggestion effect is shown in the second display mode. For example, the transition is as shown in Figure 50-1(a) → Figure 51-1(b) → Figure 50-1(c), or )→FIG. 51-1(b)→FIG. 50-2(f). Furthermore, the fluctuation display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1(c) is executed when the first display mode is a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode. For example, it can be executed when there is a transition from FIG. 50-3(a) to FIG. 51-1(c) to FIG. 50-3(b).

As shown in FIG. 51-2, another specific example of the variation end suggestion effect is, for example, a variation end in which each of the effect symbols sparkles as a background image HG in the vicinity of the effect image 70a that is being stopped and displayed. There is a mode in which a suggestion display is displayed. The variable display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2(a) is displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode or when the SP reach effect is executed, and is displayed in the reach loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. For example, the transition is as shown in Figure 50-1 (a) → Figure 51-2 (a) → Figure 50-1 (b), or Figure 50-2 (c) → It can be executed when there is a transition from FIG. 51-2(a) to FIG. 50-2(d). Furthermore, the fluctuating display suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-2(b) is when the normal reach effect is displayed in the first display mode or when the SP reach effect is executed, and when the second display mode is used to suggest a jackpot. For example, the transition is as shown in Figure 50-1(a) → Figure 51-2(b) → Figure 50-1(c), or the transition is as shown in Figure 50-2(e). )→FIG. 51-2(b)→FIG. 50-2(f). Further, the variation display suggestion presentation mode shown in FIG. 51-2(c) is executed when the first display mode is a non-reach mode and the second display mode is a non-reach loss suggestion mode, For example, it can be executed when there is a transition from FIG. 50-3(a) to FIG. 51-2(c) to FIG. 50-3(b).

In addition, in this embodiment, for example, the display time of FIG. 50-1(b) and FIG. 50-2(d) is shorter than the display time of FIG. 50-1(c) and FIG. 50-2(f). It is assumed that the display time of FIG. 50-3(b) is even shorter. In other words, the time for which the second display modes are displayed is set to increase in the order of the jackpot suggestion mode, the reach-loss suggestion mode, and the non-reach-loss suggestion mode. Furthermore, for example, the display time of FIGS. 51-1(b) and 51-2(b) is 3 seconds, and the display time of FIGS. 51-1(a) and 51-2(a) is 1.5 seconds. It is assumed that the display time of FIG. 51-1(c) and FIG. 51-2(c) is 0.5 seconds. In other words, the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance is set to be longer in order of increasing probability of a jackpot.

[Explanation of pseudo continuous performance]
Next, the pseudo continuous effect will be explained using FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2. FIG. 52-1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo continuous effect when displayed in a normal reach mode in the first display mode, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect when Here, the pseudo continuous effect is a effect executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, when the variation end suggestion effect is executed, the first display This is a performance executed between the mode and the variation end suggestion performance. For example, after being displayed in a normal reach or non-reach mode in the first display mode, it is a mode that is executed as a pseudo continuous effect by suggesting that a pseudo continuous effect will be executed.

As shown in FIG. 52-1(a), in the pseudo continuous performance when displayed in the normal reach mode in the first display mode, first, one of the performance symbols 70a in the normal reach mode in the first display mode is displayed. A pseudo-coupled display such as ``chance'' is displayed in the area where the column was displayed as a variable. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-1(b), all the symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are again displayed in a variable manner. Next, after another fluctuating display, as shown in Figure 52-1(c), two symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are again stopped and displayed with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol row is fluctuated. be done. Then, as shown in FIG. 52-1(d), although the three effect pattern rows in the effect pattern 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect patterns can be recognized, at least one pattern sequence of the special pattern TZ changes. The displayed display mode will be displayed.

As shown in FIG. 52-2(a), in the pseudo continuous performance when displayed in a non-reach mode in the first display mode, first, one of the performance symbols 70a in the non-reach mode in the first display mode is A pseudo-continuous display such as "chance" is displayed in the area where the symbol row was displayed in a fluctuating manner. Next, as shown in FIG. 52-2(b), all the symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are again displayed in a variable manner. Then, after another variable display, as shown in FIG. 52-2(c), two symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are stopped and displayed with the same symbol such as "7", and one symbol row is displayed in a variable manner. . Then, as shown in FIG. 52-2(d), although the three effect pattern rows in the effect pattern 70a are stopped and displayed and all the effect patterns can be recognized, at least one pattern sequence of the special pattern TZ changes. The displayed display mode will be displayed.

In addition, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance, we have explained the case where the first display mode is simply displayed in a normal reach or non-reach mode, but there are so-called chances that span multiple fluctuations that suggest a change in the production mode. It may also be combined with a presentation in which the presentation pattern 70a is stopped and displayed with the eye. For example, the pseudo-continuous performance may be executed after the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the chance position. Further, after the performance symbol 70a temporarily stops at the chance, the SP ready-to-win performance may be executed. Furthermore, in the pseudo continuous effect described above, the display time of FIG. 52-1(d) is assumed to be 2 seconds. Furthermore, when the second display mode is a mode that suggests a loss in reach, the special symbol TZ may be displayed in a variable manner, but the effect pattern 70a may be displayed so that it can be recognized in the form of a loss in reach. It may be 1 second.

In addition, in the above-mentioned pseudo-continuous performance, the display of FIGS. 52-1(d) and 52-2(d) is displayed from the display of the temporary stop state of FIGS. 52-1(a) and 52-2(a). In this embodiment, one pseudo-continuous performance is executed, but it is also possible to perform two to three pseudo-continuous performances. Specifically, in Figure 52-1 or Figure 52-2, the mode is (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... or (a) → (b) → (a) →... The pseudo continuous effect may be executed multiple times, or may be a combination of FIGS. 52-1 and 52-2. Furthermore, the degree of expectation for a jackpot when executing a pseudo continuous performance including the modes (a) → (b) → (c) → (a) →... in Figure 52-1 or Figure 52-2 is (a )→(b)→(a)→... may be set to be higher than the level of expectation for a jackpot when executing a pseudo-continuous performance including modes such as )→(b)→(a)→... In the pseudo continuous effect described above, the display time of FIG. 52-1(a) is 2 seconds, whereas the display time of FIG. 52-2(a) is 1 second. Note that the display time in Figure 52-1(d) may be longer than the display time for temporary stop in Figure 52-1(a), or the display time in Figure 52-2(d) may be longer than the display time in Figure 52-2(a). ) may be longer than the temporary stop display time.

[Explanation of revival performance]
Next, the revival effect will be explained using FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a diagram illustrating an example of a revival effect when the SP ready-to-reach effect is executed. Here, the revival effect is an effect executed at a predetermined timing between the first display mode and the second display mode, and in particular, when the variation end suggestion effect is executed, the first display This is a performance executed between the mode and the variation end suggestion performance. For example, in a battle performance in which an ally character C2 and an enemy character C3 face each other in the SP reach performance after the first display mode described in FIG. 50-2, the ally character C2 is defeated and the battle performance ends once. After that, the battle effect is executed again. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 53(a), a display mode is displayed that indicates that the ally character C2 has been defeated in the battle performance and suggests that the battle performance should be ended. At this time, the production pattern 70a is displayed in a reduced size at the upper left of the screen, and all of the special symbols TZ are displayed in a variable manner, and such display modes of the production pattern 70a and special symbols TZ are maintained during the execution of the revival production. The state will be as follows. Next, as shown in FIG. 53(b), a resurrection suggestion display such as "Resurrection" is displayed in the area where the effect of a confrontation between the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 was displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(c), the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 are again arranged in such a manner that the ally character C2 is made larger than before the defeat and the enemy character C3 is made smaller than before the victory. The showdown will be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 53(d), characters such as "Victory" are displayed in the area where the effect of a confrontation between the ally character C2 and the enemy character C3 was displayed. As shown in FIG. 53(e), the display suggests that the ally character C2 wins in the battle performance and ends the battle performance, and the three performance pattern rows in the performance pattern 70a are displayed in a stopped state. Although all the performance symbols are recognizable, at least one symbol row of the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner. In addition, in the above-mentioned revival effect, the display time of FIG. 53(e) is assumed to be 1 second.

In the above-mentioned resurrection performance, the characters "Victory" were displayed before displaying the display mode suggesting the end of the battle performance indicating the victory of ally character C2, but such a display mode It doesn't have to be from . For example, as shown in FIG. 53(f), although the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variable manner, a darkening effect may be performed in which the entire background image HG is darkened to black. In other words, the revival effect may be performed in the manner shown in FIG. 53(c)→FIG. 53(f)→FIG. 53(e). In addition, in the above-mentioned resurrection performance, we have explained the mode in which you win in the battle performance after resurrection and transition to the jackpot suggestion mode of the second display mode, but if you lose in the battle performance after resurrection, the second display mode It may be a mode that changes to a reach-loss suggesting mode. In such a revival effect in the case of defeat, the mode may be changed as shown in FIG. 53(c)→FIG. 53(f)→FIG. 50-2(c), for example.

It can be said that the above-mentioned battle performance, revival performance, and pseudo-continuation performance are performances that improve the expectation level by becoming the so-called jackpot suggestion mode before the second display mode. Moreover, since the performance is performed in such a manner that the level of expectation is gradually increased as the execution time of the performance passes, it can be said that the performance is a performance that gradually increases the level of expectation. In addition, the performance can be made such that the recognizable state of the performance symbol is executed a plurality of times during one change of the special symbol TZ.

[Description of other embodiments]
Next, other examples of variation end suggestion effects will be described using FIGS. 54-1 to 54-7. Each of FIGS. 54-1 to 54-6 is a diagram for explaining another example of the variation end suggestion performance, and FIG. 54-7 shows an example of the variation end suggestion production in the production pattern 5470a. FIG.

The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-1 is of a form in which each of the performance symbols 70a that is being displayed in a stopped manner executes a predetermined behavior such that each of the performance symbols itself moves and changes its position. . Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-1(a), although the "7" performance symbol that had been stopped and displayed moves upward, one of the performance symbol rows of the fluctuating performance symbol 70a is moved upward. The position is displayed unchanged. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-1(b), the effect symbols that have been moved remain in their positions, and the effect symbol array that has been variably displayed is stopped and displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-1(c), the position of the effect pattern that had been moved upward changes, returning to the position where the original effect pattern 70a was displayed, and all effect patterns 70a stop. Is displayed.

In the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 54-2, a variation end suggestion display in the form of a shutter door is displayed as a background image HG near the effect pattern 70a in which one effect pattern row is displayed in a variable manner. It is in a form that Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-2(a), when the effect pattern 70a in which one effect pattern row is variably displayed is recognizable, the shutter doors open on both sides of the effect pattern 70a are opened. A message indicating the end of fluctuation will be displayed. Next, as shown in FIG. 54-2(b), the variation end suggestion display changes so that the shutter door closes, and all the performance symbols 70a become invisible. Then, as shown in FIG. 54-2(c), the variation end suggestion display changes so that the closed shutter door opens, and all the performance symbols 70a become recognizable.

The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-3(a) is such that each of the performance symbols of the statically displayed performance symbol 70a performs a predetermined behavior such as vibrating itself. The mode of vibration shown in FIG. 54-3(a) is different from the mode shown in FIG. 51-1. Specifically, the vibration of the effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 51-1 is a mode in which it vibrates little by little in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the vibration of the effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 54-3(a) is a mode in which it vibrates largely in the left and right directions. Next, the variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-3(b) is such that a predetermined behavior is executed such that each of the performance symbols of the statically displayed performance symbol 70a shines. The shining mode shown in FIG. 54-3(b) is different from the mode shown in FIG. 51-2. Specifically, in the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. 51-2, the background image HG is in such a manner that the vicinity of each of the production patterns sparkles, whereas in the production pattern 70a shown in FIG. The manner in which the effect pattern 70a shines is such that each of the effect patterns of the effect image 70a that is being stopped and displayed shines. For example, the variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-3 is executed in a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, and becomes a non-reach-loss suggestion mode and a reach-loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. In the variation pattern, the variation end suggestion effect shown in FIG. 51-1 or FIG. 51-2 may be executed. In other words, in the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, although the variation end suggestion effect is similar to the variation end suggestion effect in the non-reach loss suggestion mode such as vibration or shine and the reach loss suggestion mode, there is a unique It can be of any aspect.

The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-4 is such that a predetermined behavior is executed in which each of the performance symbols 70a that is being stopped and displayed is greatly enlarged. Specifically, the effect pattern of the normal size effect pattern 70a shown in FIG. 54-4(a) is enlarged compared to the normal size effect pattern shown in FIG. 54-4(b). In this mode, each of the performance symbols of the performance symbol 70a is enlarged and emphasized so that the performance symbol becomes larger. The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-4 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, a unique variation end suggestion performance that is not executed as the variation end suggestion performance in the non-reach/loss suggestion mode and the reach/loss suggestion mode may be executed. can.

The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-5 is such that each of the performance symbols of the performance symbols 70a that are being stopped and displayed performs a predetermined behavior such that each of them shrinks to a small size. Specifically, at least one of the performance symbol rows is fluctuating in the production symbol 70a that is larger than normal shown in FIG. 54-5(a), and is larger than normal shown in FIG. 54-5(b). The production symbols are displayed so that all of the production symbol rows are stopped and displayed at the large production symbol 70a, and the production symbols are reduced in size compared to the normal size production symbol shown in FIG. 54-5(c). Each of the performance symbols 70a itself is in a mode of shrinking and changing. The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-5 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that is a non-reach/loss suggestion mode or a reach/loss suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in a variation pattern that is a non-reach-loss suggestion mode or a reach-loss suggestion mode in the second display mode, a unique variation end suggestion performance that is not executed as a variation end suggestion performance in the jackpot suggestion mode may be executed. can.

The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-6 is of a form in which the performance pattern itself of the statically displayed performance pattern 70a executes a predetermined behavior such as rotating. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-6(a), each of the presentation symbols of the presentation pattern 70a rotates in the same direction at the same speed, or as shown in FIG. 54-6(b), This is a mode in which the three performance symbols of the symbol 70a rotate together. The variation end suggestion performance shown in FIG. 54-6 may be executed, for example, in a variation pattern that becomes a jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode. In other words, in the variation pattern that becomes the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, a unique variation end suggestion performance that is not executed as the variation end suggestion performance in the non-reach/loss suggestion mode and the reach/loss suggestion mode may be executed. can.

The variation end suggestion production shown in FIG. 54-7 is composed of a number part 5470b whose main components are numbers, and a character part 5470c that imitates a different predetermined character for each number in the number part 5470b. This is the mode executed by the symbol 5470a. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54-7(a), only the character part 5470c vibrates or performs a predetermined action, or only the character part 5470c shines. It is. Furthermore, various effects may be performed not only on the character section 5470c but also on the number section 5470b. For example, the number part 5470b may vibrate in a manner different from that of the character part 5470c shown in FIG. 54-7(a). Furthermore, although FIG. 54-7 shows a case in which the second display mode is in a reach-loss suggesting mode, FIG. The variation end suggestion effect may be executed in the following manner.

Note that the above-mentioned fluctuation end suggestion performances may not only be executed individually, but also in a combination of a plurality of fluctuation end suggestion performances. For example, the effect pattern may behave in a predetermined manner, and a variation end suggestion display based on the background image HG may be displayed near the surrounding area. Specifically, in the statically displayed performance pattern 70a shown in FIG. It may also be a combination of a sparkling display and a sparkling display. In addition, in FIGS. 50-1 to 54-6, although the explanation is given using a performance pattern 70a whose main components are numbers, various performances can be performed using a performance pattern 5470a instead of the performance pattern 70a. Alternatively, various effects such as changing to the effect pattern 5470a instead of the effect pattern 70a at a predetermined timing may be performed.

In addition, in the embodiment described above, the display of the special symbol TZ from the first display mode to the second display mode was such that at least one symbol row was displayed in a variable manner, but all symbol rows were displayed in a variable manner. It may be displayed. For example, in the special symbol TZ in the first display mode in FIGS. 50-1 to 50-3, all symbol rows may be displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the special symbol TZ in the pseudo-continuous performance display shown in Figures 52-1 and 52-2 is such that all symbol rows are It may be displayed in a variable manner. Furthermore, all of the special symbols TZ in the performance display of the revival performance shown in FIG. 53 may be displayed in a variable manner during execution of a series of performance displays or during execution of a part of performance displays.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned embodiment, the change in the display mode when the SP reach effect is executed has been explained, but the same display mode may also be changed when the SPSP reach effect in a different form from the SP reach effect is executed. A transition may be performed. In the above-described embodiment, the variation end suggestion effect is executed in such a manner that the effect pattern itself executes a predetermined behavior immediately before the second display mode, but after the second display mode, the effect pattern A predetermined effect may be executed. For example, after the second display mode of the reach-loss suggestion mode or the non-reach-loss suggestion mode, a production pattern is executed in which the production pattern performs a predetermined behavior different from the variation end suggestion production, and all production patterns of the production pattern 70a are It may also be possible to perform an effect in which the columns are displayed in a variable manner.

[Explanation of low/high accuracy fluctuation patterns]
Next, using FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the selection rate of the variable pattern that combines the various effects described above, namely the additional effects, will be explained. FIG. 55-1 is a diagram illustrating a low-probability fluctuation pattern table that is a fluctuation pattern table in a low-probability gaming state, and FIG. 55-2 is a diagram illustrating a high-probability fluctuation pattern table that is a fluctuation pattern table in a high-probability gaming state. It is a figure illustrated. As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, each of the low-probability variation pattern table and the high-probability variation pattern table has 15 variation patterns from variation pattern 1A to variation pattern 5C. These fluctuation patterns 1A to 5C will be explained. In addition, in the low probability variation pattern table and the high probability variation pattern table, there is a variation pattern expressed by "variation pattern" + "number" + "alphabet", but if "variation pattern" + "number" are the same In this case, the first display mode and the second display mode have the same variation pattern. For example, the variation pattern 2A and the variation pattern 2B are similar in that the first display mode is a normal reach, and the second display mode is the same in a reach-loss suggesting mode. Further, the additional performance refers to any one of the above-mentioned revival performance, pseudo-continuation performance, and variation end suggestion performance, and a performance that is a combination of these performances.

Variation pattern 1 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is displayed in a non-reach mode, and the second display mode is a non-reach-loss suggesting mode. Among these, the variable pattern 1A is a pattern in which no additional performance is executed, and is selected with a probability of 85% in a low probability gaming state and 87% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 1B is a pattern in which only a variation end suggestion performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 5% in a low probability gaming state and 3% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 1C is a pattern in which only a pseudo continuous performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 10% in a low probability gaming state and 10% in a high probability gaming state.

Variation pattern 2 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is a normal reach mode, and the second display mode is a reach-loss suggesting mode. Among these, the variation pattern 2A is a pattern in which only a variation end suggestion performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 70% in a low probability gaming state and 65% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 2B is a pattern in which a pseudo continuous performance and a variable end suggestion performance are executed as additional performances, and is selected with a probability of 5% in a low probability gaming state and 5% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 2C is a pattern in which only a pseudo continuous performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 25% in a low probability gaming state and 30% in a high probability gaming state.

Variation pattern 3 is a variation pattern when the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the reach loss suggestion mode is used as the second display mode. Among these, the variation pattern 3A is a pattern in which only a variation end suggestion performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 60% in a low probability gaming state and 60% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 3B is a pattern for executing a revival performance and a variation end suggestion performance as additional performances, and is selected with a probability of 10% in a low probability gaming state and 5% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 3C is a pattern in which only a revival performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 30% in a low probability gaming state and 35% in a high probability gaming state.

Variation pattern 4 is a variation pattern in which the first display mode is a normal reach mode, and the second display mode is a jackpot suggestion mode. Among these, the variation pattern 4A is a pattern that executes only a variation end suggestion performance as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 15% in a low probability gaming state and 15% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 4B is a pattern for executing a pseudo continuous performance and a variable end suggestion performance as additional performances, and is selected with a probability of 65% in a low probability gaming state and 60% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 4C is a pattern in which only a pseudo continuous performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 20% in a low probability gaming state and 25% in a high probability gaming state.

Variation pattern 5 is a variation pattern when the SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode and the jackpot suggestion mode is used as the second display mode. Among these, the variation pattern 5A is a pattern that executes only a variation end suggestion performance as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 20% in a low probability gaming state and 15% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 5B is a pattern for executing a revival performance and a variation end suggestion performance as additional performances, and is selected with a probability of 65% in a low probability gaming state and 65% in a high probability gaming state. The variation pattern 5C is a pattern in which only a revival performance is executed as an additional performance, and is selected with a probability of 15% in a low probability gaming state and 20% in a high probability gaming state.

It is assumed that in the low-probability gaming state or the high-probability gaming state, different types of variation end suggestion performances are executed for each of variation patterns 1 to 5. For example, in the low probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 is as shown in FIG. 51-1, the variation pattern 2 is as shown in FIG. 51-2, and the variation pattern 3 is as shown in FIG. In variation pattern 4, the mode is as shown in Figure 54-3(b), and in variation pattern 5, it is as shown in Figure 54-4. It shall be a mode. Further, in each of the low-probability gaming state and the high-probability gaming state, although the variation pattern is the same, different aspects of the variation end suggestion performance are executed. For example, in the low-probability gaming state, as described above, in the high-probability gaming state, the variation pattern 1 is as shown in FIG. 51-2, and the variation pattern 2 is as shown in FIG. 51-1. In the variation pattern 3, the mode is as shown in FIG. 54-3(b), and in the variation pattern 4, the mode is as shown in FIG. 54-3(a). 5, it is assumed that the mode is as shown in FIG. 54-6.

[Explanation of fluctuation patterns depending on the number of reservations]
Using Figures 56-1 and 56-2, next, regarding the variation pattern that combines the various additional effects described above, selections are made according to the number of first special reservations and second special reservations. Explain the rate. FIG. 56-1 is a diagram illustrating a small pending fluctuation pattern table, which is a fluctuation pattern table when the pending number is small (for example, when the pending number is 1 to 2), and FIG. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating a multi-reservation fluctuation pattern table that is a fluctuation pattern table when there are many reservations (for example, when the number of reservations is 3 to 4). As shown in FIGS. 56-1 and 56-2, each of the low-holding fluctuation pattern table and the high-holding fluctuation pattern table has the same fluctuation patterns as the low-probability fluctuation pattern table and the high-probability fluctuation pattern table described above. , has 15 variation patterns from variation pattern 1A to variation pattern 5C.

As shown in Figures 56-1 and 56-2, the small-hold fluctuation pattern table with a relatively large number of holds is executed as an additional effect compared to the high-hold fluctuation pattern table with a relatively small number of holds. The selection rate for variable patterns with little effect is high. In other words, in this embodiment, when there is a large number of reservations, a variation pattern that shortens the execution time of the fluctuation performance for the reservation is likely to be selected in order to promote the use of reservations, and when there is a small number of reservations, a variation pattern that shortens the execution time of the fluctuation performance for the reservation is likely to be selected. In order to prevent the player's interest from being lost due to interruptions in the execution of variable effects when all pending events are used up, a variable pattern is set so that a variation pattern that increases the execution time of the variable effects for the pending activity is likely to be selected. There will be. In addition, with respect to the time when all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the performance symbols can be recognized, the variation end suggestion performance is executed more easily in the multi-retention variation pattern table than in the small-retention variation pattern table. This increases the selectivity of the fluctuation patterns that occur. In other words, although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the time period during which all the production symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are stopped and displayed and the production symbol can be recognized is set to be longer as the number of pending symbols increases. There will be.

[Explanation of fluctuation effect in power outage recovery process]
Here, in the power outage recovery process when recovering from a power outage in the gaming machine 1, at E250 in FIG. The power recovery screen is displayed on the first image display device 70 and the second image display device 71, and the power recovery sound is output from the audio output device 9. The variation performance may be made in a predetermined manner. Specifically, for example, in a variation pattern that is a non-reach-loss display mode or a reach-loss display mode in the second display mode, when the production symbol row and the special symbol TZ recover from a power outage while fluctuating, the first image display device After displaying the power recovery screen on 70, it is always stopped and displayed with a special variation pattern such as "515", and the time for executing the additional performance is also specified and a specific additional performance (for example, Only the variation end suggestion effect shown in 51-2) may be executed. In addition, the specific manner of the fluctuating display and stop display of the performance symbols when recovering from a power outage while the production symbol row and special symbol TZ are fluctuating is different for both cases of low accuracy and high accuracy. It may be applied regardless of the number of reservations, or it may be applied regardless of the number of reservations.

[Features of the third embodiment]
According to the present embodiment, the variable patterns 1A to 1C in which the performance symbols of all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other in the second display mode and are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggesting mode; In the second display mode, at least two of the performance symbols in the three performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the times during which all the performance symbols of the performance symbol 70a can be recognized can be made different. Specifically, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols in the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time shown in FIG. 52-2(d) in the pseudo continuous performance and the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times for all the performance symbols in variable patterns 2A to 3C are the display time shown in Figure 50-2(c) in the battle performance or revival performance, and the display time in Figure 52-2(d) in the pseudo continuous performance. , and the execution time of the variable end suggestion performance, which is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. In addition, in the variation patterns 1A to 1C and the variation patterns 2A to 3C, as described above, the mode of the variation end suggestion effect is different, and all the effects of the effect pattern 70a are displayed even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. It is also possible to make the mode of presentation in the presentation pattern different during the time when the pattern can be recognized. In this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a is different depending on whether it is non-reach or reach in the first display mode, and the performance during that time is different. Since the modes are different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the second display mode indicating the result of a jackpot or not is lost, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

According to the present embodiment, the first display mode is normal reach in the variable patterns 2A to 2C in which at least one effect pattern row of the effect pattern 70a is displayed in a variable manner and the effect pattern is not visible, and the effect pattern 70a is In the variation patterns 3A to 3C, SP reach effect is executed as the first display mode in a state where at least one effect pattern row is being displayed in a variable manner and the effect pattern is not visible; It is possible to make the time at which all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a can be recognized different from each other. Specifically, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols in the variation patterns 2A to 2C is the combination of the display time shown in FIG. 52-2(d) in the pseudo continuous performance and the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance. , 1.5 to 2.5 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols in the variation patterns 3A to 3C is the combination of the display time shown in FIG. 50-2(c) in the battle performance or revival performance, and the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance It is 3 to 5.5 seconds. In addition, in the variation patterns 2A to 2C and the variation patterns 3A to 3C, as described above, the mode of the variation end suggestion effect is different, and all the effects of the effect pattern 70a are displayed even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. It is also possible to make the mode of presentation in the presentation pattern different during the time when the pattern can be recognized. In this embodiment, the time during which all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a can be recognized differs between the normal reach and the SP reach performance in the first display mode, and Since the performance modes are different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the second display mode indicating the result of a jackpot or not is lost, and the interest can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, the variation patterns 2B, 2C, and 2C, in which at least one of a battle production, a revival production, and a pseudo-continuation production, which are productions that gradually increase the expectation level while the special symbol TZ is displayed in a variation manner, are executed. 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C, and variation patterns 2A and 4A in which none of the SP reach effect, resurrection effect, and pseudo-continuation effect are executed while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the special symbol TZ is variable. It is possible to make the time during which all the performance patterns of the performance pattern 70a which are currently displayed can be recognized different from each other. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the fluctuation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, and 5A to 5C is as shown in Fig. 52-1 (d) or Fig. 52-2 in the pseudo continuous performance. It is a combination of the display time in (d), the display time in Figures 50-2 (c) and (e) in the battle performance, the display time in Figure 53 (e) in the resurrection performance, and the execution time of the variable end suggestion performance. , 3.5 to 7 seconds. On the other hand, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols of the variation patterns 2A and 4A is 1.5 to 3 seconds, depending on whether or not the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance is included. In addition, as described above, the variation end suggestion effect is different between the variation patterns 2B, 2C, 3A to 3C, 4B, 4C, 5A to 5C and the variation patterns 2A and 4A. Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, it is also possible to make the mode of production different for the production symbols during a time when all the production symbols of the production symbol 70a can be recognized. In this embodiment, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a depends on whether or not to perform the SP reach performance, revival performance, and pseudo continuous performance while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. As well as the mode of performance during that time is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the second display mode that indicates the result of a jackpot or not is lost, and the interest can be increased. can be improved.

According to the present embodiment, while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, at least one of the revival performance and the pseudo-continuous performance in which a recognizable aspect of the performance symbol is executed multiple times during one fluctuation of the special symbol TZ is executed. As shown in Figures 55-1 and 55-2, the variation pattern in which at least one of the revival effect and the pseudo-continuation effect is not performed while the special symbol TZ is being displayed is more Although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, all the performance symbols of the performance symbol 70a can be recognized for a long time, and the probability that the second display mode becomes a jackpot suggesting mode can be increased. Specifically, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols in the variation pattern in which at least one of the revival performance, the pseudo-continuation production, and the variation end suggestion production is executed is as shown in Fig. 52-1 (d) in the pseudo-continuation production. Since the execution time of the variable end suggestion effect is the same as the display time of , or the display time of FIG. 53(e) in the revival effect, at least one of the revival effect, the pseudo continuous effect, and the variable end suggestion effect are not executed. The execution time of the variation end suggestion performance is longer than that of the variation pattern. In this embodiment, all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a are affected by whether or not at least one of the revival performance, the pseudo-continuation performance, and the fluctuation end suggestion performance is performed while the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. Since the recognizable times differ and the probability of a jackpot differs, it is possible that the player's expectations for a jackpot will be diminished when at least one of the revival effect, the pseudo-continuation effect, and the fluctuating end suggestion effect are executed. It can be prevented and the interest can be improved.

According to this embodiment, compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C in which the performance symbols of all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other in the second display mode and are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. In the second display mode, at least two of the performance symbols in the three performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggesting mode. However, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, although the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner, the time during which all the performance symbols of the performance symbol 70a can be recognized is longer, and the second display mode and It is possible to increase the probability of executing at least one of a battle performance, a revival performance, and a pseudo-continuation performance that improve expectations before becoming a player. Specifically, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols in the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time shown in FIG. 52-2(d) in the pseudo continuous performance and the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times for all the performance symbols in variable patterns 2A to 3C are the display time shown in Figure 50-2(c) in the battle performance or revival performance, and the display time in Figure 52-2(d) in the pseudo continuous performance. , and the execution time of the variable end suggestion performance, which is 1.5 to 5.5 seconds. In this embodiment, in the first display mode, the recognizable time of all the effect symbols of the effect pattern 70a is different depending on whether it is non-reach or reach, and the battle effect, revival effect, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous performances is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being impaired until the second display mode is reached, which indicates whether or not the result is a jackpot. , can improve interest.

According to this embodiment, compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C in which the performance symbols of all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other in the second display mode and are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, are better than the performance symbol 70a even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. The time during which all the performance symbols can be recognized is long, and the probability of performing at least one of the battle performance, revival performance, and pseudo-continuation performance that improves the level of anticipation before entering the second display mode is increased. be able to. Specifically, the recognizable time for all the performance symbols in the variation patterns 1A to 1C is the combination of the display time shown in FIG. 52-1(d) in the pseudo continuous performance and the execution time of the variation end suggestion performance. , 0 to 1 second. On the other hand, the recognizable times for all of the performance symbols in the variation patterns 4A to 5C are the display time shown in Figure 50-2(e) in the battle performance, the display time in Figure 52-1(d) in the pseudo-continuous performance, and the display time in the resurrection performance. This is a combination of the display time shown in FIG. 53(e) and the execution time of the variation end suggestion effect, which is 3 to 7 seconds. In this embodiment, in the second display mode, the recognizable time of all the performance symbols of the performance pattern 70a is different depending on whether there is a non-reach loss or a jackpot, and the battle performance, revival performance, Since the probability of executing at least one of the pseudo-continuous performances is different, it is possible to prevent the player's expectations for a jackpot from being impaired until the second display mode is reached, which indicates whether or not the result is a jackpot. , can improve interest.

According to the present embodiment, compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C in which the performance symbols of all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other in the second display mode and are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Therefore, in the second display mode, at least two of the production symbols in the three production symbol rows of the production symbol 70a are common, and the variation patterns 2A to 3C are stopped and displayed in a reach-loss suggestion mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. However, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, it is possible to increase the probability of executing various fluctuation end suggestion effects. In this embodiment, the probability of executing the variation end suggestion performance is different depending on whether there is a non-reach loss or a reach loss in the second display mode, so the result of whether or not it is a jackpot is suggested. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the second display mode is reached, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

According to the present embodiment, compared to the variable patterns 1A to 3C in which the performance symbol 70a is stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode or a reach-loss suggesting mode different from the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode, the jackpot in the second display mode is As shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the variation patterns 4A to 5C, which are suggestion modes, can have a higher probability of executing various variation end suggestion effects. In this embodiment, the probability of executing the fluctuation end suggestion performance is different depending on whether the second display mode is a loss suggestion mode or a jackpot suggestion mode, so the result of whether or not it is a jackpot is different. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the suggested second display mode is reached, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

According to the present embodiment, compared to the variation patterns 1A to 1C in which the performance symbols of all the performance symbol rows of the performance symbol 70a are different from each other in the second display mode and are stopped and displayed in a non-reach-loss suggesting mode that is different from the jackpot suggestion mode. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, the fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C, which are jackpot suggesting modes in the second display mode, have a higher probability of executing various fluctuation end suggestion performances. In other words, it is possible to make it possible for the probability that various fluctuation end suggestion presentations will be executed to be lower when the second display mode is in the non-reach/loss suggestion mode than when it is in the jackpot suggestion mode. In this embodiment, since the probability of executing the variation end suggestion performance is different between the case where the second display mode is a non-reach-loss suggestion mode and the case where it is a jackpot suggestion mode, the result of whether or not it is a jackpot is different. It is possible to prevent the player's expectation of a jackpot from being lost until the second display mode that suggests the above is reached, and it is possible to improve the player's interest.

According to this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 55-1 and 55-2, different types of variation end suggestion effects are executed in the high probability gaming state and in the low probability gaming state. It can be done. In other words, in the high probability game state and in the low probability game state, the mode of the variation end suggestion performance is made different, so that all the performance symbols of the performance symbol 70a are recognized even though the special symbol TZ is being displayed in a variable manner. It is also possible to make the mode of presentation in the presentation pattern different during the possible time. In this embodiment, since the mode of the variation end suggestion performance is different between the high probability gaming state and the low probability gaming state, the player can determine whether the current gaming state is high probability or low probability. It is easy to determine whether the game is true or not, and the game can be played without losing interest in the game.

In addition, in this embodiment, an icon change effect for the hold icon may also be combined. For example, the icon change performance may be executed when the first display mode of the normal reach performance, battle performance, resurrection performance, and pseudo continuous performance is displayed. Further, the possibility of the jackpot suggestion mode in the second display mode may be set to change depending on whether or not the icon change effect is executed, for example, whether the icon change effect is executed or not. The setting may be such that if the game is executed, the possibility of a jackpot suggestion mode is higher than when the game is not executed. Furthermore, such an icon change performance can be said to be a performance that improves the expectation level of the jackpot suggestion mode before the second display mode. Since the icon change performance can be executed in a stepwise manner in multiple ways, it can be said that it is a performance that increases the level of expectation in stages, and can be performed in stages during one change of the special symbol TZ. In the case of changing, it can be said that it is an effect in which the recognizable state of the effect pattern is executed multiple times during one change of the special pattern TZ.

(Fourth embodiment)
A fourth embodiment, which is an example of an embodiment of the present invention, will be described below with reference to FIGS. 57 to 72. First, the gaming machine 1P (pachinko machine) will be explained with reference to FIGS. 57 to 65.

In the following description, one side of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 57 and the direction facing inside the island installed in the game hall will be referred to as the rear direction of the game machine 1P. Further, the other side of the game board unit 12P and the direction facing the player is defined as the front direction of the game machine 1P. Further, the right direction, left direction, upward direction, and downward direction in the plane of the paper in the rear view of the game board unit 12P shown in FIG. 58 are respectively defined as the right direction, left direction, upward direction, and downward direction of the gaming machine 1P.

As shown in FIG. 57, the gaming machine 1P of this embodiment includes an outer frame 10, a gaming board unit 12P, and an inner frame 14P. The outer frame 10 is directly attached to an island installed in the game hall. The outer frame 10 is formed into a substantially rectangular shape with the vertical direction longer than the horizontal direction. The game board unit 12P and the inner frame 14P are rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 10 near one vertical side of the outer frame 10.

As shown in FIGS. 57 to 59, the game board unit 12P mainly includes a base frame 221, a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board (not shown), and a back cover 124. There is.

The game board unit 12P is rotatably attached to the outer frame 10 by having the base frame 221 rotatably attached to the outer frame 10. The game board unit 12P is configured by assembling a game board 222, an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a back cover 124, etc. to a base frame 221.

Specifically, a game board 222 is attached to the front side of the base frame 221, and an image display device 123, a lamp relay board, a back cover 124, etc. are assembled to the rear side of the base frame 221.

An opening (not shown) is formed in the base frame 221 and the game board 222 so that a liquid crystal screen (not shown) included in the image display device 123 can be seen from the front side when the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side. ing.

The game board 222 has a game area formed in which game balls flow down. The game board 222 is attached to the base frame 221 so that the game area faces the front side.

As shown in FIGS. 58 and 59, the image display device 123 is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221. The image display device 123 is arranged so as to close the opening of the base frame 221. Further, the lamp relay board is attached to the rear side of the base frame 221. The back cover 124 covers a part of the back of the image display unit including the image display device 123 and the lamp relay board.

An assembly 2P, which will be described later, is assembled on the rear side of the game board unit 12P. The assembly 2P is assembled to the base frame 221 below the portion where the image display unit is covered with the back cover 124.

As shown in FIG. 57, a fitting space 241 into which a glass plate is fitted is formed in the inner frame 14P. Therefore, when the gaming machine 1P is assembled, the gaming area set on the gaming board of the gaming board unit 12P can be seen from the front side through the glass plate fitted into the fitting space 241. Furthermore, an operating handle 142, an illuminated lamp 143, and the like are provided on the front side of the inner frame 14P.

The assembly 2P will be explained. As shown in FIGS. 59 to 61, the assembly 2P includes a pedestal 20P, a board case 3P, and a protective cover 23. The pedestal 20P is a component used to attach the board case 3P to the rear side of the game board unit 12P (see FIG. 59). As shown in FIG. 61, the pedestal 20P is formed in a substantially rectangular shape with two sides along the left and right directions longer than two sides along the up and down direction, and has a pair of shaft parts 21P near both left and right ends of the lower side. A plate-like hook 22 is provided at the center of the upper side in the left-right direction. The shaft portion 21P has an axial direction that coincides with the left-right direction.

The board case 3P is provided with a pair of hook parts 49P that are engaged with each shaft part 21P. A pair of hook portions 49P are provided on the lower side of an outer case 45P, which will be described later. The hook portion 49P is formed in a U-shape that is convex toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 62, when attaching the board case 3P to the pedestal 20P, the board case 3P is arranged so that the hook portion 49P is convex toward the back side. Then, the hook portions 49P become engageable with the shaft portions 21P, so the board case 3P is brought closer to the pedestal 20P, and each hook portion 49P is engaged with each shaft portion 21P.

When the hook portion 49P engages with the shaft portion 21P, the board case 3P is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view (in the direction of the arrow C in FIG. 62) around the shaft portion 21P. Lay it on the pedestal 20P. As shown in FIG. 60, at this time, the plate-like hook 22 provided on the upper side of the pedestal 20P is caught in the recess 3a provided on the upper side of the board case 3P. Therefore, the board case 3P is fixed to the pedestal 20P by the engagement between the hook part 49P and the shaft part 21P and the engagement between the plate-shaped hook 22 and the board case 3P.

As shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the protective cover 23 is then attached to the board case 3P. The protective cover 23 covers the lower portion of the board case 3P including the hook portion 49P. In this way, the assembly 2P is assembled and attached to the rear side of the game board unit 12P.

The control board 501 and the board case 3P will be explained. As shown in FIG. 61, a control board 501 that controls the game is housed in a board case 3P. A ROM 502 is mounted on the control board 501. Further, a plurality of electronic components 595 different from the ROM 502 are mounted on the control board 501. The plurality of electronic components 595 include various electronic components such as ICs, resistors, connectors, capacitors, and coils. Further, as shown in FIG. 63(b), a plurality of connectors 771, 772, 773, 774, 775, and 776 are mounted on the control board 501. Note that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are shown in FIG. 63(b), and may be omitted from illustration in other figures.

The ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) used for controlling the game. Further, the ROM 502 stores memory contents (data) that affect the result of the game. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged in order from left to right at the bottom of control board 501. The plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are arranged inside six openings 779 provided at the bottom of the outer case 45P of the board case 3P.

Among the plurality of connectors 771 to 776, the plurality of connectors 774 and 775 are referred to as detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include signals from at least some of the general winning opening detection switch, first starting opening detection switch, second starting opening detection switch, and big winning opening detection switch that detect that a game ball has won. signal is input. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 include a general winning opening detection switch, a first starting opening detection switch, a second starting opening detection switch, and a big winning opening detection switch 1 that detect that a game ball has won. Assume that all signals are input. Detection signal connectors 774, 775 have a different color from other connectors 771, 772, 773, 776. In this embodiment, the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 have a fluorescent color, and the other connectors 771, 772, 773, and 776 have a color different from the fluorescent color.

The ROM 502 includes a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally, and a plurality of first signal pins 582. The first signal pin 582 is a signal pin that transmits a signal between the ROM 502 and the control board 501. The first signal pin 582 is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Specifically, the first signal pin 582 extends above and below the main body 580 of the ROM 502 and is electrically connected to the control board 501. Therefore, the first signal pin 582 is visible from the front through the board case 3P.

The signal pins provided on each of the plurality of electronic components 595 are referred to as second signal pins 583 (see FIG. 61). The second signal pin 583 transmits a signal between each of the plurality of electronic components 595 and the control board 501. Note that the signal is not limited to a digital signal, but also includes an analog signal. It is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Specifically, the second signal pin 583 extends upward, downward, left, right, or forward from each electronic component and is electrically connected to the control board 501. Therefore, the second signal pin 583 is visible through the board case 3P.

As shown in FIG. 61, the board case 3P is a box-shaped case that houses the control board 501 and the ROM 502 so that they are visible and difficult to touch. Further, the board case 3P encloses the control board 501 so that a plurality of connectors 771 to 776 (see FIG. 63(b)) mounted on the control board 501 can be visually recognized. The board case 3P is made of a light-transmitting member such as transparent plastic, for example.

The board case 3P includes a plurality of members 511 that contain the control board 501, and a cutting member 6P that cuts the seal 7P. The plurality of members 511 include an inner case 40P, an outer case 45P, and a cap 8P. The inner case 40P is combined with the outer case 45P to form an inner envelope part 581 that encloses the control board 501. The outer case 45P is provided on the rear side, which is the ROM 502 side, of the board case 3P. The inner case 40P is provided on the front side of the board case 3P, which is the opposite side to the ROM 502 side. In addition, in FIG. 60(c), only the ROM 502 is shown among the electrical parts provided on the control board 501 included in the transparent board case 3P, and the illustration of other electrical parts is omitted. (The same applies to FIG. 65(a), etc.).

As shown in FIG. 64, each case 40P, 45P has a control board storage section 41P, 46P that stores a control board 501 (see FIG. 61), and a seal that constitutes a sealing base section 5P (see FIG. 65), which will be described later. It is provided with stop parts 51P and 56. The control board storage parts 41P, 46P are provided with plate parts 42P, 47P formed in a substantially rectangular shape, and protrude from the peripheral edges of these plate parts 42P, 47P. It is formed in a shape having surrounding flange parts 43P and 48P.

Further, as shown in FIG. 61, a cylindrical portion 565 extending toward the rear, which is the control board 501 side, is provided on the left side of the plate portion 42P of the inner case 40P. A hole 566 is formed in the cylindrical portion 565 and extends in the front-rear direction. A thread is formed inside the hole 566. In the control board 501, a hole 567 is provided at a position facing the cylindrical portion 565.

Control board 501 is fixed to inner case 40P. More specifically, the hole 567 of the control board 501 is arranged behind the cylindrical portion 565 of the inner case 40P. The shaft of a screw 769 (see FIG. 63) is inserted into the hole 566 of the cylindrical portion 565 from the rear side of the control board 501 through the hole 567. The thread formed in the hole 567 of the cylindrical portion 565 is combined with the thread provided on the shaft of the screw 769 (see FIG. 63(b)). As a result, the control board 501 is sandwiched between the head of the screw 769 and the rear surface of the cylindrical portion 565, and the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P. That is, the control board 501 is screwed to the inner case 40P side.

As shown in FIG. 64, a portion of the flange portion 43P of the control board storage portion 41P that protrudes from the plate portion 42P along two long sides of the plate portion 42P (hereinafter referred to as “male portion”) In each case, three L-shaped hooking grooves 430 are formed.

On the other hand, the portion of the flange portion 48P of the control board storage portion 46P that protrudes from the plate portion 47P along two long sides of the plate portion 47P (hereinafter referred to as the “female portion”) has a double wall shape. An insertion groove portion 480 into which the male portion of the control board storage portion 41P can be inserted is provided between the walls forming a double wall. Moreover, a hook piece 481 is formed in each insertion groove portion 480.

When the inner case 40P to which the control board 501 is screwed together with the screws 769 and the outer case 45P are combined, the male part of the flange part 43P is inserted into the female part of the flange part 48P. The control board storage sections 41P and 46P are then slid relative to each other in the direction of arrow α in FIG. 64 along the left-right direction. Then, the hook groove 430 provided in the male part engages with the hook piece 481, so that the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are assembled together so that they will not come apart unless they move in the opposite direction to the arrow α.

When combined in this manner, the control board housing parts 41P and 46P form a box-shaped inner envelope part 581 that is shielded from the outside. The control board 501 (see FIG. 61) is housed in the inner packaging portion 581. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the possibility that the control board 501, ROM 502, etc. are illegally replaced.

The control board 501 is attached inside the control board storage part 46P before the control board storage parts 41P and 46P are combined. At this time, the IC and the like mounted on the control board 501 are attached so as to face the plate part 47P of the control board storage part 46P. This is because the plate portion 47P is also made of transparent plastic, so even if the control board 501 is housed in the board case 3P, electronic components such as the ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501 cannot be illegally replaced. This is so that it can be checked from the outside via the plate portion 47P. As shown in FIG. 58, in this embodiment, when the assembly 2P including the board case 3P is attached to the game board unit 12P, the control board 501 inside the board case 3P is inserted from the back side of the game machine 1P through the outer case 45P. Mounted electronic components can be visually recognized.

As shown in FIG. 64, sealing parts 51P and 56 are provided at the right end of each case 40P and 45P. As shown in FIG. 65, the cases 40P and 45P are provided with a first screw-locking piece 91 and a second screw-locking piece 96 above the sealing parts 51P and 56.

When the control board housing parts 41P and 46P are slid and combined, a sealed base part 5P is formed by the sealed parts 51P and 56 at the longitudinal end of the sealed body 4P which is a combination of these parts.

As shown in FIG. 63, when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing body 4P by covering the sealing base 5P, the first screw piece 91 and the second screw piece 91 are attached to the longitudinal end of the sealing body 4P. In addition to the piece 96, a third screw stopper piece 98 provided on the cap 8P overlaps to form a screw stop portion 9P for screw fastening.

As shown in FIG. 64, the sealing portions 51P and 56 protrude rightward from the right end portions of the control board storage portions 41P and 46P. The sealing parts 51P and 56 are formed to have the same height in the left-right direction and the same width in the up-down direction.

Elongated groove portions 512, 562 are formed in each of the sealing portions 51P, 56 along the left-right direction. Two grooves 562 parallel to each other in the left-right direction are formed in the sealing part 56 and separated by a predetermined distance, and one groove 512 is formed in the sealing part 51P along the left-right direction.

As shown in FIG. 65, when the cases 40P and 45P are combined as described above, the sealing parts 51P and 56 form a sealing base part 5P on the right side of the combined control board storage parts 41P and 46P. do.

In the sealing base part 5P, the sealing parts 51P and 56 are arranged in parallel with a constant interval, and an insertion/extraction space 5ap (see FIG. 65) is formed between the faces of the sealing parts 51P and 56 facing each other. Ru.

As shown in FIG. 64, the seal 7P is used as a means to seal the board case 3P, and certifies that it is a genuine product issued by an organization with certification qualifications.

The seal 7P is made of an easy-to-cut material such as paper and has an adhesive surface provided on one side in consideration of cuttability, and has a plurality of cuts. Although not shown, for example, a hologram and a QR code (registered trademark) are printed on the seal 7P. The seal 7P also has the words "Do Not Open" printed on it.

The cutting member 6P is formed in a shape having a base portion 60P, a pair of cutting portions 61P, and a cutting portion 64P. A base portion 60P, which is the basis of the cutting member 6P, is formed in a substantially rectangular shape. A cutting portion 64P is formed on one of the two long sides of the base portion 60P. The cutting portion 64P is a portion where the tip of the base portion 60P is formed into a blade shape. The knob portions 61P are provided at both ends of the base portion 60P in the longitudinal direction, and are formed into a shape that is bent into a dogleg shape as a whole. The left end of the knob 61P is referred to as a free end 61a.

The cap 8P is formed in a size that can be placed over the sealing base part 5P to cover the entire sealing base part 5P, and is formed to be detachable from the sealing base part 5P.

The cap 8P includes a bowl-shaped box portion 80 that covers the sealing base portion 5P, and a third screw stopper piece 98 formed at one end of the box portion 80 in the longitudinal direction. A protrusion 82 is provided on the inner surface of the box part 80 at a position where the free end 61a of the knob 61P of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion/extraction space 5ap is caught when the cap 8P is attached to the sealing base part 5P. It is provided. Further, a groove portion 86 is formed on the inner surface of the box portion 80.

The cutting member 6P is inserted into the insertion/extraction space 5ap (see FIG. 65) of the sealing base portion 5P. After that, the sealing sticker 7P is pasted. Further, when the cap 8P is placed over the sealing base portion 5P, the groove portion 86 fits into a portion of the cutting member 6P inserted into the insertion/extraction space 5ap. Furthermore, the protrusion 82 engages with the free end 61a of the knob 61P of the cutting member 6P.

As shown in FIG. 63, as described above, when the cap 8P is placed over the sealing base 5P, the third screwing piece 98 connects with the first screwing piece 91 of the inner case 40P and the second screwing piece 91 of the outer case 45P. It overlaps with the screw stopper piece 96 and forms a screw stopper part 9P for screw fastening. When the caulking member 30P is driven into the screwed portion 9P, the inner case 40P, outer case 45P, and cap 8P are fixed to each other.

When unsealing the board case 3P, the caulking member 30P is removed and the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base portion 5P. The same thing happens when the seal on the board case 3P is illegally broken.

The cutting member 6P and the cap 8P are integrated. Therefore, when the cap 8P is removed from the sealing base 5P, the cutting member 6P is also removed from the sealing base 5P at the same time. Then, the seal 7P is irreparably damaged by the cut portion 64P and the like.

The identification display 520 will be explained. As shown in FIG. 61, the identification display 520 is attached to the control board 501, ROM 502, inner case 40P, outer case 45P, and cap 8P. The identification display 520 is a display that includes information regarding the gaming machine 1P. In the following description, the identification display 520 provided on the control board 501 is referred to as an identification display 521, and the identification display 520 provided on the ROM 502 is referred to as an identification display 522. The identification display 520 provided on the outer case 45P is referred to as an identification display 523, and the identification display 520 provided on the inner case 40P is referred to as an identification display 524. The identification display 520 provided on the cap 8P is referred to as an identification display 525.

As shown in FIG. 61, the identification display 521 is displayed on the upper part of the back surface of the control board 501 by silk printing. The identification display 521 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. The identification display 522 is attached to the ROM 502 by a stamp. The identification display 522 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. Identification marks 523, 524, and 525 attached to the board case 3P are information identification parts for displaying specific information. The identification mark 524 is formed on the upper right side of the front surface of the inner case 40P by stamping with a mold for manufacturing the inner case 40P (see FIG. 65). The identification display 525 is formed on the back surface of the cap 8P by marking with a mold used to manufacture the cap 8P. The display mode of the identification display 523 and its relationship with the information identification section will be described later.

Identification indicia 521-525 are related to each other and include at least identification indicia 529 suggesting the same content. In this embodiment, as an example, the identification display 521 is a character string "ABCD01", and the identification display 522 is a character string "ABCD02". The identification display 523 is a character string "ABCD03", and the identification display 524 is a character string "ABCD04". The identification display 525 is a character string "ABCD05". Identification display 529 that suggests the same content among identification displays 521 to 525 is "ABCD." The identification display 529 is a display corresponding to, for example, a manufacturer name and a model name. In this embodiment, as an example, in "ABCD", "AB" represents the manufacturer name, and "CD" represents the model name.

In addition, in the identification displays 521 to 525, instead of displaying the manufacturer name as "AB" included in "ABCD", the manufacturer name itself is displayed, such as "AA Company" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 71. You may. Furthermore, instead of displaying the model name as "CD" included in "ABCD", the model name itself may be displayed, such as "CR AIU" in identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. 71. Further, the model may be displayed in the identification displays 521 to 525, such as the model "GH101" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 in FIG. In this case, the identification displays 521 to 525 that suggest the same content are the model name "CR Aiu", the model number "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

In the following description, the surface of the outer case 45P that forms the inside of the board case 3P is referred to as the inner surface 532. In the outer case 45P, a surface forming the outside of the board case 3P is referred to as an outer surface 531. As shown in FIGS. 60(c), 63(c), and 65, a position display section 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. The position display section 541 is a part that displays the position to which the identification display 523 is attached. The position display section 541 is provided at a different location from the location overlapping the ROM 502 in the board case 3P. More specifically, the position display section 541 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the rear side, and is provided at the lower right portion of the outer case 45P. The ROM 502 is provided on the left side of the position display section 541 when viewed from the rear side. The position display portion 541 is a recessed portion recessed toward the front side.

As shown in FIG. 63(b), a seal portion 542 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the position display portion 541. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 is assumed to be transparent, for example. A printing section 797 is printed on the seal section 542. In this embodiment, as an example, the printing section 797 is the identification display 523. Since the identification display 523 is printed on the seal portion 542, the identification display 523 is attached to the position display portion 541. The seal portion 542 is arranged to straddle at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components 595 in the board case 3P. In other words, the seal portion 542 is arranged so as to overlap the plurality of electronic components 595 in the board case 3P when viewed from the rear. Note that FIG. 63(b) shows a part of the plurality of electronic components 595, and in reality, other electronic components (see FIG. 61) also exist. The identification display 523 on the outer case 45P is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized. In this embodiment, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not obstructed by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P. Note that, similar to the case of a seal portion 1561 (see FIG. 72) in a modification described later, when the board case 3P is at a predetermined angle, the identification display 523 may overlap the mounting location of the ROM 502.

In this way, when a sticker, etc. with an identification display is pasted on the object by printing, etc., and the identification display is attached to the object, the seal, etc. containing the identification display is called the information identification section. That's it. In this embodiment, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523 is an information identification portion. Note that the identification marks 520 are attached to the control board 501, the ROM 502, the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P, and the cap 8P, but one is not attached to each, but two or more are attached. Sometimes. For example, the ROM 502 may have two identification marks, and similarly may have two information identification sections.

As described above, the gaming machine 1P in this embodiment is formed. In this embodiment, a board case 3P containing a control board 501 is provided. As shown in FIGS. 60, 61, 63, and 65, the board case 3P is provided with a position display section 541 that displays the position where the identification mark 523 is to be provided. Therefore, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Furthermore, when manufacturing the gaming machine 1P, it is easier for the manufacturer to grasp the position where the identification display 520 is to be provided, compared to a case where the position display section 541 is not provided. For this reason, for example, when the seal portion 542 is used and the identification display 523 is provided by the manufacturer, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the identification display 523 will be provided at different positions among the plurality of gaming machines 1P. Therefore, compared to the case where the position display section 541 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the position display section 541 is formed on the outer surface 531 of the board case 3P, and is a recess for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display section 541, which is a recessed part, is provided, it is easier for the inspector to grasp the position of the position display section 541 than when the position display section 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the board case 3P, for example. Easy to do. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Additionally, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display section 541, which is a recess. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the position display section 541 is provided at a different location from the location overlapping the ROM 502 in the board case 3P. In this case, the possibility that the identification display 523 attached to the position display section 541 and the ROM 502 overlap can be reduced. Therefore, the inspector can check both the identification display 523 and the ROM 502 at the same time. Therefore, for example, it can be easily discovered that the ROM 502 has been replaced by fraudulent activity. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the position display portion 541 is a recessed portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the board case 3P for positioning the identification display 520 (523). Since the position display section 541, which is a recessed section, is provided, it is possible to prevent the sticker from peeling off, for example, when the seal section 542 is affixed to the flat surface of the board case 3P when touched by a hand. can. If a portion of the sticker peels off, the inspector must confirm whether it was caused by fraud, which adds time to the inspection. However, with such a position display section 541, since the seal section is protected, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 523 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the seal portion 542 including the identification display 523, which is the information identification portion attached to the board case 3P, and the identification display 522, which is the information identification portion attached to the ROM 502, are at least identification indications that suggest the same content. 529 included. Further, the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized. Further, in this embodiment, the visibility of the mounting location of the ROM 502 is not obstructed by the identification display 523 attached to the outer case 45P. The identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized, so the inspector can distinguish between the ROM 502 with the same identification mark 529 and the board case 3P. You can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity is taking place. Furthermore, even if, for example, the ROM 502 is replaced with another ROM due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can: It is easy to confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, a seal part 542 including an identification display 523 which is an information identification part attached to the board case 3P, an identification display 522 which is an information identification part attached to the ROM 502, and an information identification displayed on the control board 501. The identification display 521 that is the section includes at least an identification display 529 (in this embodiment, a character string "ABCD") that suggests the same content. Therefore, the inspector can check the control board 501, ROM 502, and board case 3P to which the identification display 529 indicating the same content is attached, and can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has occurred. Furthermore, even if at least one of the control board 501 and ROM 502 is replaced with another control board 501 and ROM 502 due to fraudulent activity, the identification marks 529 attached to the control board 501, ROM 502, and board case 3P will remain the same. By determining whether or not there is a fraud, the inspector can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

The board case 3P encloses the control board 501 such that the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible. Since the plurality of connectors 771 to 776 are visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the connectors 771 to 776 fraudulently. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are fluorescent, they are easier for the inspector to visually recognize than when they are not fluorescent. Therefore, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774, 775 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, a plurality of detection signal connectors 774 and 775 are provided. Therefore, compared to the case where there is only one detection signal connector, it is easier for the inspector to check the detection signal connectors 774 and 775. Therefore, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the detection signal connectors 774, 775 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, a first signal pin 582 included in the ROM 502 is arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Since the first signal pin 582 is visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the first signal pin 582 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the second signal pins 583 of the plurality of electronic components 595 are arranged so as to be visible through the board case 3P. Since the second signal pin 583 is visible, it can be easily determined whether or not, for example, a device different from the control board 501 is connected to the second signal pin 583 in an unauthorized manner. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the control board 501 is fixed to the inner case 40P side with screws 769 (see FIG. 63(b)). Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the control board 501 compared to the case where it is not fixed with screws. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Moreover, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P are slid together and combined. Therefore, even if a person who intends to commit fraud simply tries to separate the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P, the outer case 45P and the inner case 40P will be separated. It's hard to get caught. Therefore, it is difficult to illegally replace the control board 501. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be made. In each of the following modified examples, components corresponding to those of the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Although the position display portion 541 is a recessed portion, it is not limited thereto. For example, the position display portion 541 may be a convex portion. FIG. 66 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 63 in the outer case 45P of the board case 1003 according to a modified example of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 66, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1003 is a convex portion formed on the outer surface 531 of the outer case 45P, and protrudes toward the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542.

Further, although the position display section 541 was provided on the outer surface 531, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, the position display section 541 may be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 67 shows a cross section taken along the line AA shown in FIG. 63 in the arrow direction of the outer case 45P of the board case 1103 according to a modified example of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 67, the position display section 541 of the board case 1103 is a recess formed in the inner surface 532 of the board case 1103, and is recessed toward the rear side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case 1103 through the transparent outer case 45P.

FIG. 68 shows a cross section in the arrow direction at the position of the line AA shown in FIG. 63 in the outer case 45P of the board case 1203 according to a modified example of the board case 3P. As shown in FIG. 68, the position display portion 541 of the board case 1203 is a convex portion formed on the inner surface 532 of the board case 1203, and protrudes to the front side. An identification display 523 is attached to the position display section 541 by a seal section 542. Note that the identification display 523 is printed on the rear side of the seal portion 542. Therefore, the inspector can check the identification display 523 from the rear side of the board case 1203 through the transparent outer case 45P.

As described above, the position display portion 541 is a convex portion or a concave portion formed on the inner surface 532 or the outer surface 531 of the board case 3P and for positioning the identification display 520. Since the position display part 541, which is a convex part or a concave part, is provided, it is easier for the inspector to determine the position of the identification mark 520, compared to, for example, a case where the position display part 541 is displayed by printing or the like on the flat surface of the board case 3P. , easy to understand. Therefore, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520 attached to the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the manufacturer can position the identification display 520 along the position display section 541, which is a convex portion or a concave portion. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines 1P, the manufacturer can attach the identification display 520 to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines 1P. Since the identification display 520 is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines 1P, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display 520. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Furthermore, the plurality of members 511 that enclose the control board 501 may not include some of the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P. Further, the plurality of members 511 may further include a member different from the outer case 45P, the inner case 40P, and the cap 8P.

Further, although the control board 501, the ROM 502, and the plurality of members 511 are labeled with the identification marks 520, the invention is not limited thereto. For example, related identification marks 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511. For example, the identification mark 525 may not be attached to the cap 8P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification mark 524 may not be attached to the inner case 40P included in the plurality of members 511. Further, the identification mark 523 may not be attached to the outer case 45P included in the plurality of members 511. The inspector can check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511, and can easily check whether or not fraudulent activity has been committed. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced with another control board due to fraudulent activity, whether the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501 and the plurality of members 511 are related By determining whether a fraudulent act has occurred, the inspector can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P. In this case, the inspector should check the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P, and easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has occurred. I can do it. For example, even if the control board 501 is replaced by another control board due to fraudulent activity, the identification marks 520 attached to at least two of the control board 501, the outer case 45P, and the inner case 40P are still relevant. By determining whether or not fraud has occurred, the inspector can easily confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 520 may be attached to at least the outer case 45P and the ROM 502. In this case, the inspector can check at least the identification display 520 attached to the outer case 45P and the ROM 502, and can easily confirm whether or not fraudulent activity has been committed. For example, even if the ROM 502 is replaced by another ROM due to fraudulent activity, the inspector can easily determine whether or not the outer case 45P and the identification mark 520 attached to the ROM 502 are related. It is possible to confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Moreover, the identification displays 520 only need to be related to each other. For example, the identification indications 520 may all be the same identification indication (for example, all “ABCD01”, etc.). Further, the identification displays 520 may be different from each other, and the same identification display 529 may not be included. The content of the identification display 520 is not limited as long as it can be confirmed by the inspector. Moreover, the identification display 520 does not have to be a character string. For example, identification indicia 520 may be a variety of marks. Further, the manner in which the identification display 520 is attached is not limited. For example, not only the identification display 521 but also all of the identification displays 521 to 525 may be printed and provided on the seal portion. Further, the seal portion does not have to be transparent. Further, all of the identification marks 523 to 525 may be engraved using a mold for manufacturing the board case 3P.

Moreover, the identification display 520 may be formed inside the material of the board case 3P. The modified example will be described below with reference to FIGS. 69 and 70. A board case 1303 shown in FIGS. 69 and 70 is a modification of the board case 3P. In the board case 1303, a portion where the identification display 523 is displayed is referred to as an identification display section 1390. Further, a portion outside the identification display portion 1390 is referred to as an outside portion 1391. As shown in FIG. 70, the identification display portion 1390 protrudes rearward from the outer portion 1391. Therefore, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391.

The identification display 523 is formed inside a member (in this embodiment, the material of the outer case 45P) forming the identification display section 1390. The identification display 523 is provided in the identification display section 1390 by being divided into a plurality of (four in this embodiment) layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (front-back direction).

The character “A” 1371 of the identification display 523 is formed in the layer 1381. The character “B” 1372 is formed in a layer 1382. The character “C” 1373 is formed in a layer 1383. The letter “D” 1374 is formed in the layer 1384. The character “0” 1375 is formed in the layer 1382. The character “3” 1376 is formed in the layer 1383.

Note that the method of forming the identification display 523 inside the member forming the identification display section 1390 is not limited. For example, the identification indicia 523 may be formed by 3D laser engraving. 3D laser engraving is a technology that focuses a laser beam to form minute cracks of, for example, 100 microns at intervals of, for example, 0.08 mm to 0.016 mm inside the material of the substrate case 3P. By forming a plurality of cracks, an identification mark 523 is formed inside the board case 3P.

In this embodiment, the identification display 523 is formed inside a member forming the identification display section 1390. Therefore, for example, the identification mark 523 is more difficult to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface 531 or the inner surface 532 of the board case 3P. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased. Furthermore, if the identification display 523 is removed by unauthorized means, a scratch will be formed on the board case 1303. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent activities. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, the identification display 523 is provided in the identification display section 1390 by being divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction. Therefore, the identification mark 523 is more difficult to remove than when the identification mark 523 is formed on only one layer. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, in the board case 1303, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 is larger than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. In this case, when an unauthorized person attempts to remove the identification display 520, it is necessary to cut the board case 3P deeper than when L1 is less than or equal to L2. Therefore, the board case 1303 is easily damaged. Therefore, the inspector can easily discover fraudulent activities. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Note that the identification display 523 does not need to be divided into a plurality of layers 1381 to 1384 in the thickness direction in the identification display section 1390. For example, the identification mark 523 may be formed only on one layer. Further, the thickness L1 of the identification display portion 1390 may be equal to or less than the thickness L2 of the outer portion 1391. Further, although the identification display 523 has been described, the identification display 520 provided on the board case 1303, such as the identification displays 524 and 525, may be similarly formed inside the board case 1303.

In the above embodiment, the board case 1303 is an example of the "case part" of the present invention.

Moreover, various seals other than the seal portion 542 and the like may be attached to the board case 3P. Furthermore, the contents displayed on the printing sections (for example, the printing section 797) provided on various seals such as the seal section 542 are not limited. For example, in addition to the seal portion 542, a seal portion 1560 and a seal portion 1561 are attached to a board case 1551 according to a modified example shown in FIG. Note that, in FIG. 71, members having the same configuration as those in the above embodiment are indicated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

The seal portion 1560 is attached to the upper part of the outer case 45P of the board case 1551 at the center in the left-right direction. The seal portion 1561 is attached to the upper left part of the outer case 45P of the board case 3P. The seal portions 1560 and 1561 are made of a light-transmitting material. Seal portions 1560 and 1561 are each placed across a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61). Note that, in FIG. 71, illustrations of various electronic components such as a plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61) located in front of the seal portions 1560 and 1561 are omitted.

A printing section 1571 is printed on the seal section 1560. The printing section 1571 includes a plurality of areas 1575. The printing portion 1571 is colored, and in this embodiment, has a white base as an example. The multiple areas 1575 include a code section 1572, an information display section 1573, and a writing area 1570. The seal portion 1560 is provided so that the printing portion 1571, the code portion 1572, the information display portion 1573, and the writing area 1570 do not overlap with the ROM 502.

The cord portion 1572 is provided at the upper left portion of the seal portion 1560. Code section 1572 includes predetermined information. The code section 1572 is a section from which information is read by another device, and for example, a QR code (registered trademark), barcode, etc. is printed in black in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area. There is. In this embodiment, as an example, the code section 1572 includes a QR code (registered trademark).

The code section 1572 is linked to, for example, information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1P (hereinafter referred to as "other device"). For example, a URL (Uniform Resource Locator), which is information included in the code section 1572, is read by a camera installed in a mobile information terminal or the like. The information mobile terminal uses the URL to access other devices via the network. As a result of accessing other devices, the information displayed on the mobile information terminal includes the delivery destination of the control board 501 (for example, the name of the store where the gaming machine 1P was delivered), and whether the gaming machine 1P has been discarded. Contains information on. This allows the inspector to easily confirm information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 and information such as whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been discarded.

Information display section 1573 includes various information. The information display section 1573 may include the same information as the identification display 529, for example. In this embodiment, as an example, a character string "EF001" is printed in a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) area on the information display section 1573. The character string is, for example, the management number of the control board 501. Using the management number, the inspector can check information such as the delivery destination of the gaming machine 1P and whether or not the gaming machine 1P has been disposed of, based on information linked to the management number held by the manufacturer. Note that the character string in the information display section 1573 may include information corresponding to the manufacturer's name, model name, model, etc. Further, the rectangular region of the information display section 1573 and the rectangular basin of the code section 1572 are connected in the left-right direction.

For example, a total of six writing areas 1570 are provided, three rows in the vertical direction and two columns in the horizontal direction. The writing area 1570 is printed with a rectangular colored (white in this embodiment) base. Above the writing area 1570 on the upper left, "Opener" is printed in black. Above the writing area 1570 in the upper right corner, "date opened" is printed in black. A circle 1 is printed on the left side of the upper left writing area 1570. A circle 2 is printed on the left side of the writing area 1570 at the vertical center on the left side. A circle 3 is printed on the left side of the lower left writing area 1570.

For example, when the inspector opens the board case 3P, the inspector writes the name of the inspector in the writing area 1570 on the left, and writes the date of opening the board case 3P in the writing area 1570 on the right. Note that the inspector may write in the writing area 1570 the date and time when it was confirmed whether or not the control board 501 was tampered with.

The seal portion 1560 includes a viewing portion 1574 for viewing the electronic component 798. The viewing portion 1574 is provided between the plurality of regions 1575. The viewing portion 1574 has light transparency. In this embodiment, the peeking portion 1574 is formed by an unprinted portion of the seal portion 1560 and is transparent. In this embodiment, a viewing portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between three rows of writing areas 1570 in the vertical direction. Further, a peeking portion 1574 extending in the left-right direction is provided between the code portion 1572 and the information display portion 1573 that are lined up left and right, and the upper two writing areas 1570. A viewing portion 1574 extending in the vertical direction is provided between the two rows of writing areas 1570 in the left and right direction.

Further, the sticker section 1561 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu", the model number "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed. In this embodiment, the portion on which this information is printed is also referred to as a printing portion 1563. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is referred to as an identification display 1595. In this embodiment, the identification display 1595 is the model name "CR Aiu", the model number "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company".

Further, a seal portion 1562 is attached to the ROM 502. The seal portion 1562 is attached to the left side of the identification display 522 "ABCD02" of the ROM 502. The sticker section 1562 is an information identification section for displaying specific information. For example, at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed as the specific information. In this embodiment, as an example, the model name "CR Aiu", the model "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" are printed on the seal portion 1562 as predetermined information. Further, specific information displayed on the seal portion 1562 is referred to as an identification display 1596. In this embodiment, the identification display 1596 is the model name "CR Aiu", the model number "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company". Note that the identification display 522 of the ROM 502 is also an information identification section, that is, in this embodiment, the ROM 502 is provided with two information identification sections.

Furthermore, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1562 are displayed including identification marks 1595 and 1596 that suggest at least the same content. In this embodiment, the species name "CR Aiu", the model type "GH101", and the manufacturer name "AA Company" in the identification displays 1595 and 1596 are all the same, but it is only necessary that some of them are the same.

Note that although the identification marks 1595 and 1596 are attached to the board case 3P and the ROM 502, they may be attached to other members. For example, the control board 501 may be displayed including the same identification display as the identification displays 1595 and 1596.

As described above, the board case 1551, control board 501, etc. according to this modification are formed. In this embodiment, since the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 are arranged to straddle at least part of the plurality of electronic components 595 (see FIG. 61), for example, the seal portions 542, 1560, 1561 and the electronic component 595 are By checking the positional relationship, the inspector can determine whether or not the control board 501 has been tampered with. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, since the area 1575 is provided, the inspector can write the name of the inspector and the date of opening the board case 3P in the area 1575 (more specifically, the writing area 1570). can. Furthermore, the inspector can also write in the area 1575 the date on which it was confirmed whether or not fraud was committed on the control board 501. Further, since the viewing portion 1574 is provided between the regions 1575, the region 1575 is more conspicuous than when only the region 1575 is provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the examiner to confirm the characters written in the area 1575. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, and the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since the viewing section 1574 is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component 798 through the viewing section 1574. Therefore, compared to the case where the viewing section 1574 is not provided, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been performed on the electronic component 798. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is provided at a position that does not overlap with the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can easily check the ROM 502. Therefore, the inspector can check the ROM 502 and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, the code section 1572 is linked to information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501, which is stored in a device different from the gaming machine 1P. Thereby, the inspector can easily confirm the information indicating the delivery destination of the control board 501 using the code section 1572. Therefore, the inspector can check the information on the delivery destination and easily determine whether or not a fraud has been committed in which the control board 501 from a different delivery destination has been installed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Further, a sticker portion 1562 is pasted on the ROM 502, and predetermined information is displayed on the sticker portion 1562. Therefore, by checking the seal portion 1562, the inspector can easily confirm whether the ROM 502 is being replaced illegally. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Furthermore, since at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name is printed on the seal portion 1561, the inspector can easily grasp at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name. I can do it. Therefore, the inspector can confirm at least one of the model name, model, and manufacturer name and easily determine whether or not fraud is being committed. Therefore, players can play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

Note that the shape of the ROM 502 is not limited. As shown in FIG. 63, the ROM 502 in the above embodiment has a plate-shaped main body portion 580 extending vertically and horizontally. However, the main body portion 580 may extend in the front, rear, right and left directions. In this case, the first signal pin may extend forward and be electrically connected to the control board 501. Furthermore, when the main body section 580 extends in the front, rear, left, and right directions, the predetermined information displayed on the seal section 1591 may be displayed on the upper surface or the lower surface of the main body section 580.

Further, the various information displayed on the seal portions 542, 1560, and 1561 may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized. For example, FIG. 72 is a diagram of the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 viewed diagonally from above. In FIG. 72, illustration of members other than the seal portion 1561 and the ROM 502 is omitted. In this case, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 overlaps the mounting location of the ROM 502. That is, FIG. 72 is a diagram viewed from an angle where the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 makes it difficult to visually recognize the mounting location of the ROM 502. However, as shown in FIG. 71, when viewed from the rear side, the mounting location of the ROM 502 can be visually recognized. That is, FIG. 71 is a diagram viewed from an angle where the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 can visually confirm the mounting location of the ROM 502. In this way, the information displayed on the seal portion 1561 is displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized. Although the description has been made using the seal portion 1561 as an example, various information displayed on the other seal portions 542 and 1560 (for example, information on the identification display 523) may be displayed at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized. It is fine if it is done.

(Fifth embodiment)
Next, a fifth embodiment, which is an example of an embodiment of the present invention, will be described with reference to FIGS. 73-1 to 73-6. Note that in the fifth embodiment described below, the same components as in the fourth embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

First, an overview of the configurations of the board case 1700 and control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73-1 to 73-4. FIG. 73-1 is a rear view of a board case 1700 housing a control board 1705 according to the fifth embodiment. FIG. 73-2(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the seal portion 1710, and FIG. 73-2(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the date mark portion 1720. FIG. 73-3(a) is a schematic diagram illustrating the configuration of the tamper-proof seal portion 1730, and FIG. 73-3(b) is a schematic diagram illustrating the state in which the tamper-proof seal portion 1730 is attached to the board case 1700. It is a schematic diagram. FIG. 73-4 is a schematic diagram illustrating the display configuration of the information display 1750.

As shown in FIG. 73-1, the gaming machine 1P of the fifth embodiment includes a control board 1705 and a board case 1700 that houses the control board 1705. The board case 1700 has substantially the same configuration as the board case 1551 which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes a seal part 1710, a date mark part 1720, a tamper-proof seal 1730, and a RAM clear operation part 1785, which will be described later. ing. The control board 1705 has substantially the same configuration as the control board 501, which is a modification of the fourth embodiment, but includes an information display 1750, an operation key section 1780, and a RAM clear button, which will be described later.

The seal portion 1710 is made of a light-transmitting material and is attached to the upper part of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700 at the center in the left-right direction. Note that each of the seal portions 1710 is arranged to straddle a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) and the like. The date mark portion 1720 is formed at the lower part of the left-right center of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700 so as to be convex from the outer case 45P on the front side of the outer case 45P. The tamper-proof seal section 1730 is attached to a seal attachment section 1701 formed at the right end of the board case 1700 in the left-right direction. Note that the seal pasting portion 1701 is a portion covered by the cap 8P. The RAM clear operation unit 1785 is formed at the lower part of the right side in the left-right direction of the outer case 45P of the board case 1700, and is configured to be able to operate the RAM clear button on the control board 1705. The operation key section 1780 has a structure in which a specific key can be inserted and rotated, and since the insertion port for the specific key is exposed from the outer case 45P of the board case 1700, the control board 1705 can be inserted into the board case. 1700 so that it can be operated while stored in the 1700. Note that the operation key section 1780 is connected to the main CPU that controls the game of the gaming machine 1P so that a signal indicating whether or not the operation key section 1780 has been operated can be transmitted.

The information display 1750 is provided at the upper right corner of the control board 1705 in the left-right direction, and is placed inside a board case 1700 made of transparent resin that covers the control board 501. Furthermore, the information display 1750 is located at a different position from the main CPU, main ROM, and main RAM provided on the control board 501, and is located at a RAM clear operation section provided on the board case 1700. It is provided at a position where visibility is not obstructed by the seal portion 1785 or the seal portion 1710. Furthermore, none of the plurality of electronic components provided on the control board 1705 such as the electronic component 595 is provided around or in the vicinity of the information display 1750. Although such an information display device 1750 is provided on the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, it is conspicuous, so that the displayed information can be easily recognized.

Here, the information display 1750 and an out ball detection switch (not shown) will be explained. The out-ball detection switch detects all the game balls (referred to as "out-balls" in this embodiment) fired into the gaming area, and connects the connection cable so that data of the detection results can be sent to the main control board 300. connected. The information display 1750 displays various performances of the gaming machine 1P using numerical values calculated by the main CPU based on the detection results from the out ball detection switch (values calculated using a calculation formula described later). be. Note that it is possible to judge whether or not the performance of the gaming machine 1P is being maintained, depending on whether or not the numerical value displayed on the information display 1750 is within a predetermined range.

As shown in FIG. 73-2(a), the seal section 1710 has substantially the same configuration as the seal section 1560, and includes a printing section 1711, a code section 1712, an information display section 1713, a writing area 1570, and a viewing section 1574. We are prepared. Furthermore, by reading the QR code (registered trademark) in the code section 1712 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display section 1713. . In other words, predetermined information including specific information is displayed in different forms, such as the QR code (registered trademark) in the code section 1712 and the character string in the information display section 1713. Here, the configurations of the code section 1712 and the information display section 1713 are different from the configurations of the code section 1572 and the information display section 1573 of the seal section 1560. Specifically, the character string "EF001" is printed across the colored area of the code section 1712 and the colored area of the information display section 1713. With the seal section 1710 having such a configuration, if either the colored area of the code section 1712 or the colored area of the information display section 1713 is scraped off and the information is changed illegally, compared to the seal section 1560, Traces of changes can be easily seen, and unauthorized changes to information can be prevented. Further, as described above, the electronic component 798 provided at a position covered by the seal portion 1560 is visible from the viewing portion 1574, but this means that at least a portion or the entire electronic component 798 is not connected to the control board. This means that it is not only visible through the viewing section 1574 from a direction perpendicular to the control board, but also visible through the viewing section 1574 from a direction not perpendicular to the control board but at a predetermined angle. It is. Specifically, electronic components provided in a position covered by the seal portion 1560 that are difficult to see due to the colored area 1575 from a direction perpendicular to the control board 1705 are covered by the seal portion 1560. 1560, and can be viewed through the viewing portion 1574 from a direction forming a predetermined angle rather than perpendicular to the viewing portion 1560.

As shown in FIG. 73-2(b), the date mark section 1720 is a section that displays the date when the board case 1700 was manufactured, and is composed of a date display section 1721 and a year/month display section 1726. . The date display section 1721 has a scale from 1 to 31 formed on the outer edge of a circular shape, and the manufacturing date is indicated by an arrow extending from the center of the circle. The year/month display section 1726 has a scale from 1 to 12 formed on the outer edge of the circle, and an arrow extending from the center of the circle indicates the month of manufacture, and a number formed at the center of the circle indicates the month of manufacture. The year is shown. In other words, the date mark section 1720 shown in FIG. 73-2(b) indicates that the board case 1700 was manufactured on "December 1, 2014." Note that the date mark portion 1720 shown in FIG. 73-2(b) is when the outer case 45P is viewed from the front side of the gaming machine 1P, and when the board case 1700 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1P. In this case, it will be shown inverted (for example, see FIG. 73-1).

As shown in FIG. 73-3(a), the tamper-proof seal section 1730 includes an information display section 1731 on which a predetermined character string is printed, a code section 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark), etc. is printed, and a code section 1732 on which a QR code (registered trademark) is printed. A hologram display section 1735 on which a hologram is formed is provided. Note that by reading the QR code (registered trademark) in the code section 1732 with a predetermined terminal, the information displayed on the predetermined terminal includes the character string described in the information display section 1731. Good too. That is, predetermined information including specific information may be displayed in different formats, such as a QR code (registered trademark) in the code section 1732 and a character string in the information display section 1731.

As shown in FIG. 73-3(b), when the tamper-evident seal part 1730 is pasted on the seal pasting part 1701, it is pasted across the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P of the board case 1700. It is attached so as to cover a part of the boundary 1738 when the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are combined. That is, since it comes into contact with the control board 1705 housed in the board case 1700, when the inner case 40P and the outer case 45P are disassembled, the tamper-proof seal portion 1730 will be broken. In other words, the tamper-evident seal portion 1730 is an identification display portion whose shape changes when the board case 1700 is disassembled, unlike identification display portions such as the seal portion 1705 and the like that are attached with various identification information. Further, the information display section 1731 and the code section 1732 of the tamper-proof seal section 1730 are affixed to the back side of the gaming machine 1P in the seal affixing section 1701 so that the entirety thereof is visible. Furthermore, the information display section 1731 and the code section 1732 of the tamper-proof seal section 1730 are provided at a position that is one step lower in the thickness direction of the board case 1700 with respect to the top surface of the board case 1700 in the thickness direction. It will be done. In other words, the seal portion 1710 and the tamper-evident seal portion 1730 in the board case 1700 are configured to have different distances from the virtual plane extending the control board 1705 in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the control board 1705. ing.

As shown in FIG. 73-4, the information display 1750 includes a control section (not shown), four 7-segment display sections 1770a to 1770d arranged in a row horizontally, and a lower right corner of each 7-segment display section. It is composed of four dot display sections 1775a to 1775d. The information display 1750 also transmits data from the main control board 300 so that the main control board 300, which has received the result detected by the out-of-ball detection switch 302a, outputs measured data based on the detection result. Connected to allow output. Furthermore, the information display 1750 is always lit when the gaming machine 1P is powered on. In the information display 1750, when viewed from the front, two 7-segment display sections 1770a and 1770b and two dot display sections 1775a and 1775b located on the left side are used as an identification display section 1780a, and two 7-segment display sections 1770a and 1775b located on the right side are The 7-segment display sections 1770c and 1770d and the two dot display sections 1775c and 1775d are referred to as a ratio display section 1780b. It is assumed that circuits are connected to the four 7-segment display sections 1770a to 1770d and the four dot display sections 1775a to 1775d.

[Description of display mode on information display 1750]
Next, a specific display mode on the information display 1750 will be described with reference to FIGS. 73-5 and 73-6. FIG. 73-5 is a table explaining the contents and display format displayed on the information display 1750 regarding the performance display of the gaming machine 1P, and FIG. 3 is a table explaining displayed contents and display formats.

As shown in FIG. 73-5, when the performance of the gaming machine 1P is displayed on the information display 1750, the numerical value calculated by the main control board 300 is displayed on the ratio display section 1780b. Specifically, the game is played when the gaming state is in a low certainty state in a predetermined period from the time the power is turned on for the first time (every time the total number of out balls reaches 60,000 after the total number of out balls reaches 300 from the time the power is turned on for the first time). The ratio between the number of balls put out and the number of out game balls in a low probability state (for example, when it is not a time saving game in a low probability state) is output, and the calculation formula is ``(Payout in a low probability state) Number of pitches) ÷ (Number of out pitches in low probability state) x 100", and the value rounded to the first decimal place is output. Note that when the output value is 100 or more, "99." is displayed on the ratio display section. Further, even if the RAM is cleared and the power is turned on again, the current measurement is set to be carried over unless there is an abnormality in the RAM.

In the identification display section 1780a, information that can be identified about the type of numerical value displayed on the ratio display section 1780b is displayed. Specifically, when the measured value of the current section is displayed at the present time, "bL." is displayed, and when the calculated value from the previous section to the section before the previous section is displayed, "b1." is displayed. ” to “b3.” are displayed. In addition, the blinking cycle in Figure 73-5 is 0.3 seconds on and 0.3 seconds off, and the timing of display switching from "bL." to "b3." is repeated for 5.0 seconds in each display. shall be taken as a thing.

Here, the flow of measurement in the gaming machine 1P of this embodiment will be explained. First, when the gaming machine 1P is powered on for the first time and a game is started, the out ball detection switch starts detecting game balls that are ejected from the out ball ejection port when the probability is low. Here, since the game balls discharged from the out ball discharge port are from all the out ports in the gaming area, the number of game balls based on the detection result by the out ball detection switch becomes the total number of out balls. Then, after the total number of out balls reaches 300, the put-out ball measurement switch (switch that detects the number of game balls paid out as prize balls, not shown) for each predetermined interval in the low probability state and The information display 1750 outputs a calculated value calculated by the main CPU based on the detection result from the out-ball detection switch.

Furthermore, the gaming machine 1P is capable of changing the setting of the jackpot probability, and the setting of the jackpot probability can be changed by operating the setting key 1780 and the RAM clear button of the RAM clear operation section 1785. Specifically, when the gaming machine 1P is powered on and the RAM clear button is set to "ON" with the setting key section 1780 "ON", the jackpot probability setting is changed according to the number of times the RAM clear button is pressed. The setting can be confirmed by turning the setting key section 1780 "OFF" when the setting is set to be changed. Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1P is powered on and the RAM clear button is not operated with the setting key 1780 "ON", the current jackpot probability setting of the gaming machine 1P will be displayed on the information display 1750 as described later. , you can check the settings. Note that when the gaming machine 1P is shipped, when the recovery information is damaged, or when a recovery error occurs due to the power being turned off and on while changing the settings, the power is on and the setting key 1780 is set to ``ON'' to restore the RAM. If the clear button is set to "ON", settings can be changed, but unless the RAM clear button is operated with the setting key 1780 "ON" while the power is on, the game will be stopped.

As shown in FIG. 73-6, specifically, in the gaming machine 1P of this embodiment, the jackpot probability is set at the first setting (low probability: 1/300) to the sixth setting (high probability: 1/250). ) can be set in six stages. In this setting change and setting confirmation, the 7-segment display section 1770d located on the right side of the information display section 1750 displays "1" to "6" depending on the setting value to be changed or the setting value currently set. It will be lit. Furthermore, when a setting change is made, all 7-segment display sections 1770a to 1770d and dot display sections 1775a to 1775d blink for 5 seconds after the end of the setting change. After blinking for 5 seconds, the identification display section 1780a and the ratio display section 1780b start displaying the performance of the gaming machine 1P described above. In addition, when changing or confirming settings, while changing/confirming settings, a voice indicating the current status such as "Settings are being changed" or "Settings are being confirmed" and a warning siren are output, as well as a warning siren. ``Changing settings/Checking settings'' will be displayed on the LCD screen. In addition, in such a gaming machine, regardless of the type of setting of the jackpot probability, the selection rate of a specific performance (in Figure 73-6, "first performance") at the time of a jackpot, and the selection rate of a loss It is assumed that the selection rate of a particular performance is constant.

Here, the words and phrases used in the table of FIG. 73-6 will be explained. "(When it's a jackpot/when it's a loss) first production selection rate" means that the "first production" is selected (executed) in the production that is executed when it is determined to be a "jackpot" or "loss". This is the probability.As mentioned above, this "first performance selection rate" is constant regardless of the jackpot probability of each setting from the first setting to the sixth setting. ``First effect appearance rate'' is the probability that the ``first effect'' will be executed in the effect executed based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device.In the case of a ``jackpot'' The "first effect appearance rate" is a value that can be calculated by multiplying the "jackpot probability" for each setting by the "first effect selection rate".In addition, the "first effect appearance rate" in the case of a "lose" is a numerical value that can be calculated by multiplying the "loss probability" in each setting by the "first performance selection rate".The "loss probability" means that the first starting device or the second starting device It is the probability of being judged as a "lose" in the judgment based on the ball entering the field, and is a value that can be calculated by subtracting the "jackpot probability" from "1".What is the "overall first performance appearance rate"? , is the probability that the "first effect" will be executed in the effect that is selected (executed) together with the determination based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probability variable gaming state. The "overall first effect appearance rate" is a numerical value that is the sum of the "first effect appearance rate at the time of jackpot" and the "first effect appearance rate at the time of loss" in each setting. "Performance reliability" is the "first performance" that is executed when the "first performance" is executed in accordance with the judgment based on the ball entering the first starting device or the second starting device in the non-probability variable gaming state. This is the probability that the "first performance" is the "first performance" that was executed together with the judgment of "jackpot". This is a numerical value that can be calculated by dividing by "Rate".

[Operations and effects of the fifth embodiment]
If the gaming machine 1P includes an assembly 2P having a sealing part 1720 as in this embodiment, the sealing part 1720 is provided with a peeking part 1574, so the inspector can inspect the board case through the looking part 1574. By visually checking the control board 1705 housed in the control board 1700, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been committed against the control board 1705. Therefore, compared to a game machine equipped with a board case that is not provided with something like the viewing part 1574, the inspector can easily confirm whether or not fraud has been carried out on the control board 1705. This can lead to a reduction in the possibility of fraud being committed. In addition, in such a seal portion 1720, predetermined characters can be written in the writing area 1570, which is a plurality of colored areas, so there is no colored area that reduces light transmittance, and the predetermined character can be written in the transparent part. It is also easier for the inspector to confirm the content of the information in text compared to stickers that have text written on them. Furthermore, in such a seal part, since the transparent peeking part 1574 is provided between the plurality of colored areas, namely the description area 1570, the code part 1712, and the information display part 1713, only the plurality of colored areas are lined up and The colored area stands out compared to the case where the color area is provided, and the inspector can easily confirm the characters written in the writing area 1570, the code section 1712, and the information display section 1713.

Further, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in the present embodiment, the opening date written in the writing area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark Although the manufacturing date displayed in section 1720 is different information, they have a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the opening date written in writing area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the manufacturing date displayed in date mark portion 1720. Therefore, by checking the consistency between the opening date in the writing area 1570 of the seal part 1720 and the manufacturing date in the date mark part 1720, the inspector can prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized control board replacement. It can be easily confirmed.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the tamper-proof seal portion 1730 as in the present embodiment, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 is associated with the information displayed on the tamper-proof seal section 1730. Therefore, by checking the consistency between the information on the seal section 1720 and the information on the tamper-proof seal section 1730, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. Further, the code portion 1732 of the tamper-evident seal portion 1730 has a distance from the virtual surface in which the control board 1705 is extended in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the board case 1700. The seal portion 1720 is provided at a different distance from the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713. Therefore, compared to a case where the code section 1732 of the tamper-proof seal section 1730, the code section 1712 of the seal section 1720, and the information display section 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane, The information in the code section 1732 of the tamper-proof seal section 1730, the code section 1712 of the seal section 1720, and the information display section 1713 can be easily recognized, and fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are different in the thickness direction of the identification display section 1390. Since they are formed in layers, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed at different distances from the top surface of the board case 1700. Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case section 1700, it is easier to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or inner surface of the case section, for example. It's difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction, so it is not formed on only one layer. This makes it more difficult to remove than if there were. If such an identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the board case 1700, making it difficult for the inspector to discover the fraud. It can be said that this method is easy to implement and can suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping parts and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap when viewed from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P. It is possible to see the characters 1372 together with the characters 1372, and it is also possible to easily check whether or not there is any fraudulent activity on the control board 1705 or the like.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in the present embodiment, the characters 1371 and 1372 are different from each other in the thickness direction of the identification display section 1390. Since the characters 1371 of the hierarchy 1381 and the characters 1372 of the hierarchy 1382 are formed on different levels, the character 1371 of the hierarchy 1381 and the character 1372 of the hierarchy 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, when the control board 1705 is moved in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). The distances from the stretched virtual plane are different. Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case section 1700, it is easier to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or inner surface of the case section, for example. It's difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. If such an identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the board case 1700, making it difficult for the inspector to discover the fraud. It can be said that this method is easy to implement and can suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping parts and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap when viewed from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P. It is possible to see the characters 1372 together with the characters 1372, and it is also possible to easily check whether or not there is any fraudulent activity on the control board 1705 or the like.

Furthermore, if the gaming machine 1P includes the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 as in this embodiment, the QR code (registered trademark) in the code portion 1712 and the character string in the information display portion 1713, etc. Information that is linked to each other and includes the same specific information is displayed in different ways. Therefore, it is difficult to commit fraud against the code section 1712, and even if the information in the information display section 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity by checking the consistency with the code section 1712. It is possible to check the actual situation and also to deter fraudulent acts. Furthermore, in the seal portion 1720, a peeking portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713, and the writing area 1570, so that unauthorized access to the control board 1705 can be made in the same way as described above. Since it can be easily confirmed whether or not fraud has been committed, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced.

Furthermore, according to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in this embodiment, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 have the viewing portion 1574. It can be visually recognized without any intervention. Therefore, since some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be viewed without using the viewing section 1574 are more visible on the control board 1705 than electronic components that can be viewed through the viewing section 1574. Possible fraudulent acts against some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy visual recognition when the game board unit 12 of the game machine 1P is opened, it is required to have the above-mentioned effects.

[Other forms of the fifth embodiment]
In the above-mentioned embodiment, although detailed explanation is omitted, seal portions 542, 1561, 1562, identification displays 521, 522, 523, and connectors 771 to 776 are also included. Among these, the seal portions 542, 1561, 1562 and the identification displays 521, 522, 523 display predetermined information that can be identified, so they may be so-called identification displays. In addition, items on which identifiable predetermined information is displayed include a sticker part 1710, a date mark part 1720, a tamper-proof seal part 1730, and an information display 1750 that displays performance and setting displays of the gaming machine. It may be included in Furthermore, although not shown, among the various electronic components provided on the control board 1705, color codes displayed on lead resistors, identification codes displayed on network resistors, and model numbers displayed on ICs, capacitors, and transistors. A code or the like may also be an identification display since predetermined information that can be identified is displayed. Since the connectors 771 to 776 in the above-described embodiments have different opening shapes and pin numbers, the opening shapes and pin numbers of the connectors 771 to 776 are information that can be identified. It may be included in the display. Although not shown, a connector number is displayed on the control board 1705 near each of the connectors 771 to 776, and this connector number is also identifiable information and is included in the identification display. Good too.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible from the peeking portion 1574 of the seal portion 1710, but the area where the electronic components are visible is limited to this. However, as long as the electronic components of the control board 1705 are visible even through the board case 1705, various forms may be used, and the same effect will be achieved. For example, if a difficult-to-see area is provided in multiple colored areas, and if the control board can be seen from an area with higher light transmittance than the colored area among the plurality of difficult-to-see areas, the area will also be the same. It has the effect of In addition, in these visible areas, not only the electronic components of the control board are visible, but also the control board itself, the wiring pattern of the control board, the legs of the electronic components, etc., and the same effect is achieved. . In addition, in these visible areas, transparent sockets (connectors) for ROM, which will be described later, can also be seen, and transparent sockets (connectors) are used not only for ROM but also for various electronic components such as ICs, transistors, and various resistors. If such transparent sockets (connectors) are provided, these transparent sockets (connectors) can be visually recognized. If such a visible area is provided, similar effects such as being able to deter fraudulent acts against electronic components can be achieved.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification mark 523 is printed on the seal part 542, but as explained in FIGS. An identification display 523 may be provided. Such an identification display 523 may be composed of characters 1371 to 1376 as described above, but is not limited to this and may have various compositions. For example, it may be composed of a plurality of pieces of identifiable predetermined information, that is, a plurality of so-called identification displays. In other words, a plurality of identification displays may be formed in a plurality of hierarchies. For example, a configuration as shown in FIG. 73-7 may be used. FIG. 73-7 is a diagram illustrating a modification of the identification display formed inside the member forming the board case, and (a) is a cross-sectional view of the identification display portion 1791 of the board case 1790 according to the modification. (b) is a sectional view of an identification display section 1796 of a board case 1795 according to a modification. Note that the identification displays 1794 and 1799 in FIG. 73-7 are formed, for example, by 3D laser engraving inside the identification display parts 1791 and 1796, similarly to the identification display 523 in FIGS. 69 and 70. . Furthermore, the identification marks 1794, 1799 and the identification marks 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) may be formed by molding the board case with a metal mold.

As shown in FIG. 73-7(a), the identification marks 1794 on the board case 1790 according to the modification are five identification marks: "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". It is formed inside the member (material of the outer case) that forms the identification display section 1791. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 in three layers 1793a to 1793c in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b for "A" is formed on the layer 1793a, the identification display 1792c for "B" is formed on the layer 1793b, and the identification display 1792a for "C" and "0" are formed on the layer 1793b. The identification display 1792d of "3" and the identification display 1792e of "3" are formed so as not to overlap in the vertical direction (vertical direction in FIG. 73-1) in the hierarchy 1793c. When the identification display section 1791 having such a configuration is viewed from the left side (from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), each of "A", "B", and "C03" is different. The identification display 1794 can be visually recognized as being hierarchical, and the identification display 1794 is configured such that "C", "0", and "3" do not overlap.

As shown in FIG. 73-7(b), the identification marks 1799 on the board case 1795 according to the modified example are "A", "B", "C", "0", "3", similar to the identification marks 1794. ", and is formed inside the member (material of the outer case) forming the identification display section 1796. Further, the identification display 1794 is provided in the identification display portion 1791 in four layers 1793a to 1793d in the thickness direction. In the identification display 1799, the identification display 1797b for "A" is formed on the layer 1798a, the identification display 1797d for "B" and the identification display 1797c for "0" are formed on the layer 1798b, and the identification display 1797b for "A" is formed on the layer 1798b. The identification display 1797a of "C" is formed on the layer 1798c, and the identification display 1797e of "C" is formed on the layer 1798d. When the identification display section 1796 is viewed from the back side of the gaming machine 1P, "A", "B", and "C" can be visually recognized so that they do not overlap in the left-right direction (left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), Identification display 1799 configured such that when the identification display section 1796 is viewed from the left side (direction from left to right in the left-right direction in FIG. 73-1), "0" and "3" do not overlap in different hierarchies. can be visually recognized.

According to the identification marks 1794, 1799 and the identification marks 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such configurations, the distance from the top surface of the board case to the specific identification mark may be different, or the distance between the board case and the board case may be different. The distance from the control board 1705 to the specific identification display may be different. Specifically, for example, in the identification display 1794, the identification display 1792b has a smaller distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 than the identification display 1792a, but has a larger distance from the control board 1705. It is formed. Further, the identification display 1792c is formed such that the distance from the top surface of the board case 1790 is smaller than the identification display 1792a, but larger than the identification display 1792b. On the other hand, the identification display 1792c is formed such that the distance from the control board 1705 is larger than the identification display 1792a, but smaller than the identification display 1792b.

Further, according to the identification displays 1794, 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such configurations, the surface forming the thickness of the identification display portion (the side surface in the left and right direction in FIG. 73-1) is The distance from the forming surface to the particular identification mark can also be configured to be different. Moreover, according to the identification displays 1794, 1799 and the identification display 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70) having such configurations, the top surface of the board case, the control board 1705, and the surface forming the thickness of the identification display section It is also possible to configure the specific identification display to be approximately the same distance from either of the two. If the identification markings are formed in multiple layers inside the member forming the identification marking part as described above, each identification marking will be difficult to remove and, if removed by being scraped, as described above. Since traces of removal remain, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Note that in the above, the distance from the control board 1705 to each identification mark refers to the distance from the surface of the control board 1705 on which the wiring pattern is formed to each identification mark.

Moreover, according to the identification display 1799 having such a configuration, it is possible to configure each identification display so that the visible directions and angles are different. Specifically, as described above, the identification display 1797a and the identification display 1797b in the identification display 1799 are configured to be visible from different directions and angles. Therefore, with the identification display formed in this way, the identification display can be formed in a direction or angle that is easily visible to the inspector, which can lead to the prevention of fraudulent acts. In addition, if there is a member near the identification display section that obstructs the visibility of the identification display (for example, a member that is thicker than the identification display section), please place it in a position where the visibility is not obstructed by the member. It is also possible to form individual identification indicia. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the identification display section, there may be no provision of a member that obstructs the visibility of the identification display.

Furthermore, the above-mentioned identification indications 1794 and 1799 were made up of individually independent identification indications 1792a to 1792e and 1797a to 1797e, but some of the plurality of identification indications may be used as one identification indication. It may be something that constitutes an identification display. Specifically, in the identification display 1794, two identification displays 1792b and 1792c constitute predetermined information that can be identified, and three identification displays 1792a, 1792d, and 1792e constitute predetermined information that can be identified. You can also use it as In the identification display 1799, two identification displays 1797a and 1797c constitute identifiable predetermined information, and three identification displays 1797b, 1797d, and 1797e constitute identifiable predetermined information. Different identification displays may be configured depending on the direction or angle. In the identification displays 1794 and 1799, similarly to the identification display 523 described in FIGS. 69 and 70, each of the five identification displays may constitute one piece of identifiable predetermined information. In this way, five identification marks constitute one piece of identifiable predetermined information, specifically, there are combinations such as "manufacture", "manufacturing", "number", "number", and "NO.". More specifically, for example, in the identification display section 1791, "Made" and "Made" are displayed as identification indicators in the hierarchy 1793a, "Number" and "No." are displayed as identification indicators in the hierarchy 1793b, and in the hierarchy 1793c. "NO." or "1234" may be displayed as an identification display. In addition, in the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), "Made" is displayed as an identification display at the position of the identification display 1371 of the hierarchy 1381, and "Made" is displayed as the identification display at the position of the identification display 1372 of the hierarchy 1382. "Number" is displayed as an identification display in the position of the identification number 1373 of the hierarchy 1383, "No." is displayed as an identification display in the position of the identification number 1374 of the hierarchy 1384, and the identification display 1375 of the hierarchy 1382 is displayed. "NO." may be displayed as an identification mark at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383, and "1234" may be displayed as an identification mark at the position of the identification number 1376 of the hierarchy 1383.

According to the above-mentioned identification indications 1794, 1799 and identification indication 523 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), the identification indications are "A", "B", "C", "0", and "3". Although the present invention is made up of five identification displays, the present invention is not limited to this, and various types of identification displays may be displayed. Specifically, in the identification display section 1791, "manufacturer name" is displayed as an identification display in a hierarchy 1793a, "model name" is displayed as an identification display in a hierarchy 1793b, and "manufacturing place" is displayed as an identification display in a hierarchy 1793c. The "manufacturing date" and "material name of the control board" may also be displayed. Further, as other specific examples in the identification display section 1791, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1793a, a "model name" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1793b, and an identification display is displayed in the layer 1793c. The "manufacturer name" may be displayed as the display. Further, in the identification display section 1791, "manufactured" and "made" are displayed as identification marks in the hierarchy 1793a, "number" and "number" are displayed as the identification marks in the hierarchy 1793b, and "NO" is displayed as the identification marks in the hierarchy 1793c. ." or "1234" may be displayed.

Furthermore, in the identification display section 1390 (see FIGS. 69 and 70), "manufacturer name" is displayed as an identification display in a layer 1381, "model name" is displayed as an identification display in a layer 1382, and a "model name" is displayed in a layer 1383 as an identification display. The "manufacturing place" and "manufacturing date" may be displayed as the identification display, and the "control board material name" may be displayed on the hierarchy 1384 as the identification display. Further, as other specific examples in the identification display section 1390, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1381, a "model name" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1382, and a "model name" is displayed as an identification display in the layer 1383. The "manufacturer name" may be displayed as the display, and the "control board material name" may be displayed on the hierarchy 1384 as the identification display. Further, in the identification display section 1390, "Made" and "Made" are displayed as identification indicators in the hierarchy 1381, "Number" and "No." are displayed as identification indicators in the hierarchy 1382, and "NO .'' is displayed, "1234" is displayed as an identification display on the hierarchy 1384, and each identification display is displayed so that it is visible from the back side of the gaming machine 1P so that it does not overlap. good.

Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the identification display formed on the identification display section of the board case has been described in detail, but predetermined identifiable information may be displayed on the control board. For example, there is a control means having a control board and a board case, in which various identification marks are displayed at different positions in the thickness direction of the board case. Specifically, a "QR code (registered trademark)" is displayed as an identification display at the position closest to the top surface of the board case, and a position closer to the control board than the "QR code (registered trademark)" as an identification display is displayed. In some cases, the "model name" is displayed as an identification display, and the "manufacturer name" is displayed at the position closest to the control board or on the control board itself.

(Sixth embodiment)
Next, a sixth embodiment, which is a modification of the fourth embodiment of the present invention described above, will be described with reference to FIGS. 74-1 to 74-9. FIG. 74-1 is a rear view of a board case 1803 housing a control board 501 according to the sixth embodiment. FIG. 74-2 is a diagram showing a state in which the electronic component 595 is viewed diagonally from above through the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1561. FIG. 74-3 shows (a) a plan view and (b) a side view of the transparent socket 1801. 74-4 are cross-sectional views (a) to (d) in the direction of arrows of the board cases 1805 to 1808 at positions corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. 74-5 are cross-sectional views (a) and (b) of the board cases 1809 and 1810 in the direction of arrows at a position corresponding to the line CC in FIG. 74-1. FIG. 74-6 is an explanatory diagram showing the special position display section 541. FIG. 74-7 is an explanatory diagram of one method for reducing the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560. FIG. 74-8 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1813 housing the prize ball board 1811. FIG. 74-9 is a schematic rear view of the case portion 1823 housing the effect board 1821. Note that in the sixth embodiment described below, the same components as in the fourth embodiment are given the same reference numerals as in the fourth embodiment, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 74-1, the gaming machine 1P of the sixth embodiment mainly stores a control board 501, a ROM 502 mounted on the control board 501, a plurality of electronic boards 595 mounted on the control board 501, and A case part 1803, a seal part 1560 and a seal part 1561 affixed to the case part 1803, a seal part 1562 affixed to the ROM 502, and an identification display part 1390 provided in the case part 1803. The parts other than the case part 1803 have already been explained. The case portion 1803 is also substantially the same as the case portion 1551 except that the position display portion 541 is provided on the seal portion 1560.

Note that, as described above, the information identification part refers to a sticker part with an identification mark attached, but during the description of the sixth embodiment, a seal part without an identification mark will never appear. Therefore, in the description of the sixth embodiment, the seal section will be referred to as an information identification section. Specifically, the seal portion 1560 may be referred to as a first seal portion, and may also be referred to as a first information identification portion. The seal portion 1561 may be referred to as a second seal portion, and may also be referred to as a second information identification portion. The seal portion 1562 may be referred to as a third information identification portion. Further, the entire seal part can be considered not as one information identification part, but as an aggregate of a plurality of information identification parts. For this reason, for example, when the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, the description may be made as including three information identification portions.

[ROM502 installation part]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-3, the ROM 502 is removably attached to the control board 501 via a transparent socket (connector) 1801. FIG. 74-3(a) is a plan view of a state in which a ROM is installed in a transparent socket, and FIG. 74-3(b) is a side view of a state in which a ROM is installed in a transparent socket. Note that the control board 501 is omitted in both figures. The transparent socket 1801 has the same function as a normal socket, but is taller and the resin part of the socket is made of a transparent material. That is, even inside the socket, it is possible to visually check whether any unauthorized wiring or the like is connected to the first signal pin 582 of the ROM 502. Thereby, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts such as so-called dangling boards. More specifically, when the transparent socket 1801 is mounted on the control board 501, the pins 1802a of the transparent socket 1801 are visible. This can prevent unauthorized wiring or the like from being connected to the pin 1802a. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

[Position display section 541]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-4(d), the position display section 541 is a linear recess. FIG. 74-4(d) shows a cross section of the case portion 1803 in the arrow direction at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 74-1. As shown in FIG. 74-4(d), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1803 is a linear recessed portion that is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. It is a concave portion that is concave toward the rear. A seal portion 1560 on which a printed portion 1571 is printed is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1803.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 67 and 68, a position display section 541 is formed on the inner surface 532 of the case sections 1103 and 1203, and the seal section 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 using the position display section 541 as a mark. It may also be pasted (not shown). Furthermore, as another modification, the position display section 541 may be a linear convex section, as shown in FIG. 74-4(c). FIG. 74-4(c) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a case portion 1807, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to line CC in FIG. 74-1. As shown in FIG. 74-4(c), the position display portion 541 of the case portion 1807 is a linear convex portion that is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 and formed on the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1807. , protrudes anteriorly. A seal portion 1560 on which a printed portion 1571 is printed is pasted on the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1807. That is, the position display portion 541 described in the present paragraph and the previous paragraph is formed as a concave and/or convex portion on the inner surface 532.

In this way, when forming a concave and/or convex position display section on the inner surface 532 and attaching the seal section 1560 to the outer surface 531, the position display section 541 will not overlap with the seal section 1560 no matter where the seal section is attached. Since there is no interference, it does not interfere with pasting. If a portion of the sticker peels off, the inspector must confirm whether it was caused by fraud, which adds time to the inspection. However, with such a position display section 541, the inspector can easily check the printed section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Further, when a seal portion is attached to the outer surface 531 and a position display portion 541 is provided on the inner surface 532, the position display portion 541 is the outer edge of the seal portion 1560 attached to the outer surface 531, and/or the inner edge of the seal portion 1560, Or/and the seal portion 1560 may be formed to intersect inside and outside. This will be briefly explained. In FIG. 74-6, the position display section 541a provided on the case section 1820 is formed on the inner edge of the seal section 1560, and the portion of the position display section 541b extending in the left-right direction in the figure is located at the inner edge of the seal section 1560. It is designed to intersect the inside and outside. The portion of the position display portion 541 extending in the vertical direction in the figure is on the outer edge of the seal portion 1560, and it can be said that this portion is also formed to intersect the inside and outside.

In addition, as a modification of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-2(a), a seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1805, and the position display portion 541 is formed as a linear convex portion on the outer surface 531. It may be provided. FIG. 74-2(a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a case portion 1805, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 74-1. As shown in FIG. 74-2(a), the position display section 541 of the case section 1805 is a linear convex section that is slightly larger than the outer edge of the seal section 1560 and formed on the outer surface 531. It stands out. A sticker portion 1560 on which a printed portion 1571 is printed is pasted on the inside of the position display portion 541.

Since the position display section 541, which is a linear convex section, is provided, the seal section 1560 is more easily touched than the case where the seal section 1560 is attached to a flat case section, for example, when it is touched by a hand. Peeling can be prevented. That is, it is possible to use the seal portion 1560 as a mark for pasting, and to prevent the seal portion 1560 from peeling off after pasting. If a part of the seal portion 1560 is peeled off, the inspector must confirm whether it is due to fraud, which takes time for the inspection. However, with such a position display section 541, since the seal section 1560 is protected, the inspector can easily check the printed section 1571 printed on the seal section 1560. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

In addition, as another modification example, as shown in FIG. 74-2(b), a seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1806, and a position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. may be a linear recess. FIG. 74-2(b) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a case portion 1806 which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 74-1. As shown in FIG. 74-2(b), the position display part 541 of the case part 1806 is a linear recess formed in the outer surface 531, which is one size larger than the outer edge of the seal part 1560, and extends toward the front. It is a concave recess. A sticker portion 1560 on which a printed portion 1571 is printed is pasted on the inside of the position display portion 541.

In addition, as another modified example, as shown in FIG. may also be provided on the inner surface 532. FIG. 74-5(a) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a case portion 1809, which is a modification of the case portion 1803, at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 74-1. The position display section 541 on the outer surface 531 protects the seal section 1560, and the position display section 541 on the inner surface 532 allows the seal section 1560 to be attached to a more accurate position.

In addition, as another modification example, as shown in FIG. 74-5(b), a seal portion 1560 is attached to the outer surface 531 of the case portion 1810, and a position display portion 541 is provided on the outer surface 531. may be made into a convex portion and a concave portion. FIG. 74-5(b) shows a cross section in the arrow direction of a case portion 1810, which is a modification of the case portion 183, at a position corresponding to the line CC shown in FIG. 74-1. The seal portion 1560 can be further protected.

The position display portion 541 described above is a convex portion or/and a concave portion, but does not need to be a convex portion or/and a concave portion as long as it can display the position where the seal portion 1560 is attached. The position display section 541 is formed at a position that avoids a peeking section 1574, which will be described later. Note that "formed" is not limited to those that are integrally formed, but also includes those that are attached with a seal or the like. Further, the position display section 541 may be L-shaped to display the position of a part (corner) of the seal section 1560. Further, the predetermined position behind the first surface 531 of the case portion 1803 does not only refer to the inner surface 532 of the case portion 1803. If it is assumed that the seal portion 1560 is attached without the substrate 501, the position display portion 541 may be provided on the inner case 40P, and it is possible to attach the seal portion 1560 with the substrate 501 included. If it is assumed, a position display section 541 may be provided on the substrate.

[Seal part 1560]
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-1, the seal part 1560 on which the printed part 1571 is printed has lower light transmittance than the case part 1803 and the seal part 1561, and also allows the electronic component 595 to be seen through. It has a predetermined light transmittance. The light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 does not need to be uniform. For example, the light transmittance may be reduced by printing something like a pattern. In this case, even if the light transmittance differs in parts, it is sufficient that the light transmittance as a whole is lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561. In this embodiment as well, a pattern of thin lines is printed in the shaded area in the figure, reducing the light transmittance. The fact that light transmittance varies depending on the pattern will be briefly explained using FIG. 74-7. In FIG. 74-7(a), the background of the seal portion 1560 has a wave-like pattern, and in FIG. 74-7(b), the background of the seal portion 1560a has a lattice pattern. Although it is possible to see through the electronic component 595 in both cases, it can be seen that the light transmittance in FIG. 74-7(a) is lower.

Note that the case portion 1803 has the highest predetermined light transmittance, and the seal portion 1561 has a predetermined light transmittance that is slightly lower than the light transmittance of the case portion 1803. As a result, the ROM 502 is visible through the light transmittance of the case portion 1803, and the electronic component 595 is visible through the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 or the seal portion 1560. As a method for making the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 lower than that of the case portion 1803 and the seal portion 1561, the light transmittance of the material of the seal portion 1561 may be lowered, or the light transmittance of the seal portion 1561 may be reduced. Transparency may also be reduced.

It is more difficult to forge the seal part 1560 than when the light transmittance of the seal part 1560 and the light transmittance of the case part 1551 and the seal part 1561 are the same, and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. In addition, when the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, it is not obvious at first glance that the light transmittance is lowered by the pattern, which makes it more difficult to counterfeit the seal portion 1560, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

In addition, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 74-1, a portion of the seal portion 1560 that is not a colored area 1575 but is not marked with a predetermined character has a unique character that can be identified only when viewed from a predetermined angle. Information 1804 (K in this embodiment) is displayed. Note that in this embodiment, characters are used, but symbols or figures may be used. Furthermore, the continuity of the pattern changes at the boundary between the first area 1814 where unique information is formed by the pattern and the second area 1815 where the unique information is formed by characters and patterns. According to this, it becomes even more difficult to forge the seal portion 1560, so that it is possible to further suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased. Note that the sticker section 1560 is an information identification section for displaying specific information.

Further, as shown in FIG. 74-2, at least one different electronic component 595 is attached in a range visible through the seal portion 1561 and a range visible through the seal portion 1560. By pasting a seal portion having a light transmittance depending on the type of electronic component 595, it is possible to easily discover fraud and make it difficult to commit fraud. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Note that the information written on the seal portion 1561 is assumed to include the model name, model code, external terminal information, manufacturer name, QR code (registered trademark), rated voltage, power consumption, precautions, and the like. Further, the seal portion 1561 and the seal portion 1560 are attached at an angle that allows the mounting location of the ROM 502 to be visually recognized.

[1st display, 2nd display]
Furthermore, in this embodiment, the case portion 1803 including the control board 501, ROM 502, and electronic component 595 is referred to as a control means, and a first display 1371 and a second display 1372 are provided at different predetermined locations in the control means. ing. The first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are different in distance from the surface 501a of the control board 501 on which the ROM 502 is mounted until the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 are displayed. Note that the first display 1371 and the second display 1372 do not refer only to the identification display section 1390, but as shown in FIG. This is also included if the distance from the surface 501a is different. The surface 501a of the control board 501 on the outer case 45P side, the opposite surface, a stamp on the inner case 40P, a stamp on the outer case 45P, various kinds of seals, etc. are assumed.

However, the information identification section and the display do not represent the same information. Note that the seal part and the information identification part are not synonymous, and a plurality of information identification parts may exist in one seal part. For example, if the manufacturer name, model name, and model number are displayed on the seal portion 1561, this means that there are three information identification portions. The relationship between the information identification section and the display will be explained using an example. For example, if the first information identification part is a manufacturer's name, the first display is not the manufacturer's name, but is, for example, the model name displayed on the sticker part. Further, the second display is, for example, the model name displayed on the surface of the board 501 on the inner case 40P side. Note that the second information identification section is, for example, information on the person who opened the seal section 1560, and the third information identification section is, for example, the manufacturer's name of the seal section 1562. Since the control means is provided with complicated first and second displays that are located at different distances from the control board, counterfeiting of the board 501 and the case portion 1803 can be prevented.

[Prize ball board 1811]
Further, in this embodiment, the prize ball board 1811 and its case portion 1813 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 74-8, a prize ball board 1811 capable of two-way communication with the control board 501 is housed in a case portion 1813 having optical transparency. A ROM 1812 is installed on the prize ball board 1811. Moreover, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1812 are mounted on the prize ball board 1811. The ROM 1812 stores data used to control the prize balls.

A seal portion 1816 made of a light-transmitting material is attached to the case portion 1813. The seal portion 1816 is printed with a plurality of colored areas 1817, which are areas with reduced light transmittance. Further, the seal portion 1816 has a viewing portion 1819 that allows viewing of the electronic component 595 between the colored regions 1817 in a portion where predetermined characters are not attached. The seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 have a light transmittance that allows the electronic component 595 to be seen through, and the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 have different light transmittances. In this embodiment, the seal portion 1560 has lower light transmittance than the seal portion 1816. For example, the seal portion 1560 may have a wave-like pattern as shown in FIG. 74-7(a), and the seal portion 1816 may have a lattice pattern as shown in FIG. 74-7(b).

Since the light transmittance of the seal portion 1560 and the seal portion 1816 is different, it becomes difficult to counterfeit the seal portions 1560 and 1816, thereby making it difficult to commit fraud such as replacing the entire case portions 1551 and 1813 with an unauthorized board 501 and 1811. I can do it. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Although not provided in this embodiment, a case portion 1813 including a prize ball board 1811, a ROM 1812, and an electronic component 595 is used as a prize ball means, and first and second displays are provided at different predetermined locations in the prize ball means. A third display and a fourth display may be provided, such as (1371, 1372).

[Direction board 1821]
Further, in this embodiment, the effect board 1821 and its case portion 1823 are included in the configuration of the invention. As shown in FIG. 74-9, the performance board 1821, which can be controlled through one-way communication from the control board 501 or the prize ball board 1811, is housed in a case portion 1823 that is light-transmissive. A ROM 1822 is installed on the production board 1821. Furthermore, a plurality of electronic components 595 (not shown) different from the ROM 1822 are mounted on the effect board 1821. The ROM 1822 stores memory contents used to control the performance. Note that the control board 501 and the award ball board 1811 are foot-type boards, as shown in FIG. 74-6, and the performance board 1821 is a surface-mount type board. Examples of surface mount include surface mount on both sides, surface mount on one side, surface mount on the entire surface, and surface mount on part of the surface.

The case part 1823 is made of a light-transmitting material like the seal part 1560, and has a plurality of colored areas printed thereon, which are areas with reduced light transmittance. A seal portion having a viewing portion through which the electronic component 595 can be seen is not attached to the portion not marked with the characters . A seal portion having a colored area and a peeking portion is not attached to the case portion 1823, but only to the case portion 1803. Since the seal portions are treated differently in this way, it becomes difficult to forge the seal portion 1560 and the case portion 1803, and therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

As shown in FIG. 75, the control board 501 may include a first region 1900a and a second region 1900b having a different aspect from the first region 1900a. Here, the different aspects refer to differences that can be visually recognized, such as different colors or different shades of color between the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b. In addition, the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b may be surrounded by a line or a pattern, or the like, or the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b may be separated by a step. One or a combination of these can be used. For example, the second region 1900b of the resist applied to the surface of the control board 501 may be darker or lighter green than the first region 1900a. Further, it is preferable that the first region 1900a is set corresponding to the range in which the ROM 502 and the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 are arranged on the control board 501. On the other hand, it is preferable that the second region 1900b is set corresponding to a range in which board-mounted components such as the ROM 502, electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502, and connectors 771 to 776 are not arranged on the control board 501, for example. , it is preferable to set it at the edge of the control board 501. Note that the first area 1900a and the second area 1900b may have different colors and other aspects as described above. For example, the arrangement range of the ROM 502 and the arrangement range of the electronic components 595 other than the ROM 502 on the control board 501 may be different. It is also possible to have different modes. The first region 1900a and the second region 1900b can be provided on either or both of the mounting surface (rear surface) of the control board 501 or the front surface facing the back surface of the game board unit 12P. Alternatively, the first region 1900a may be provided on one of the rear surface or the front surface of the control board 501, and the second region 1900b may be provided on the other of the rear surface or the front surface of the control board 501.

As shown in FIG. 75, the control board 501 may be provided with an information identification section 1902 for displaying specific information in the second area 1900b. The information identification section 1902 may include an identification display 521 that includes information similar to the identification display 529 described above. In this way, by providing the information identification section 1902 in the second region 1900b which has a different aspect from the first region 1900a, the information displayed in the information identification section 1902 can be made easier to see. Therefore, the inspector can easily determine whether or not fraud has been performed on the control board 501, and management can be facilitated. In addition, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play games with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

When specifically distinguishing between the control board 501, the board excluding board-mounted components such as the mounted electronic components 502 and 595 is sometimes referred to as a "board", and a "board" on which board-mounted components are mounted is referred to as a "board". It is sometimes referred to as the "control unit". Although it is preferable that the first region 1900a and the second region 1900b be provided on the substrate, regions having different modes may be provided on the substrate mounted component.

The above-mentioned identification display 523 is divided into a plurality of layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 in the thickness direction (back and forth direction) in the identification display section 1390, instead of the identification display 523 provided on the outer case 45P. Rather, the identification display 524 provided on the inner case 40P, the identification display 525 provided on the cap 8P, the identification display 521 provided on the control board 501, the identification display 522 provided on the ROM 502, etc., are attached to the control unit. It can be applied to the identification display 520. The objects to be divided into the hierarchies 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are not limited to the characters 1371 to 1376, but may also be displays consisting of a plurality of identifiers such as figures, patterns, codes, and combinations of characters. For example, the relationship between the identification displays 520 may be divided into the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 as described above.

Although the positions of the layers 1381, 1382, 1383, and 1384 are explained using the object on which the identification display 523 is provided (in the thickness direction of the identification display section 1390), if the identification display 523 is provided on the outer case 45P, If the identification mark 524 is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the outer case 45P and is provided on the inner case 40P, the identification mark 521 is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the inner case 40P and provided on the control board 501 or the board mounted component. , 522, the positions are different in the thickness direction of the substrate. It can be said that the identification mark 521 attached to the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board, and the identification mark 521 attached to the mounting surface (rear surface) of the board and the identification mark 522 attached to the ROM 502 are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board. It can be said that the identification mark attached to the front side is located at a different position in the thickness direction of the substrate. In addition, the outer case 45P, which constitutes the surface on which the board-mounted components are mounted, is further away from the board than the inner case 40P in order to secure installation space for the board-mounted components, and an identification mark 523 attached to the outer case 45P It can be said that the identification marks 524 attached to the inner case 40P are located at different positions in the thickness direction of the board.

Identification displays that are associated with each other are not limited to those in which the relationship can be directly recognized by the manufacturer, etc., but can also be verified by checking with information held by the administrator, or converted by equipment owned by the administrator, etc. The relationship may be one that can be understood by doing so. For example, even if the identification marks 523 to 525 attached to the board case 3P do not include the same identifier as the identification marks 521 and 522 attached to the control board 501, the information held by the administrator can be referred to. For example, both identification displays 520 include common information. In other words, identification indications that are associated with each other may include a mode in which the relationship can be directly determined from information that can be recognized through visual recognition, and a mode in which the relationship cannot be directly determined from information that can be recognized through visual recognition. . In this manner, the relationship between the identification displays is not obvious at first glance, making it difficult for anyone other than the manufacturer or administrator to rewrite, reducing the possibility of fraud, and allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

In this case, "first display", "second display", "third display", "fourth display", "first information display", "second information display", "first information identification section", The "second information identification section," "third information identification section," and "fourth information identification section" are not limited to those described in the above embodiments, and may include a sticker, code information or characters printed on the sticker, or a case. It is possible to adopt the display method and overall display content of information regarding the gaming machine on the board or board case, such as the inscription, model name, manufacturer name, board management information, case management information, etc.

<Contents of the invention described in the first embodiment>
In a conventional gaming machine, when a starting condition is established, determination information on whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player is acquired and the determination information is stored. Then, when the determination condition is met, the stored determination information is determined, and a variable performance is executed according to the result of the determination, and when the variable performance results in a special result, a special game is executed. Some of these gaming machines display a pending image corresponding to undetermined determination information (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2015-33530). Furthermore, the gaming machine improves the interest of the game by changing the normal pending image to a pending image with a display mode that suggests the possibility that the variable performance may result in a special result. However, there is still room for improvement in the gaming machine described above in order to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a first configuration for solving the above problems, the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a command from the main control means. In the gaming machine, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a holding unit (main RAM 110c) capable of holding the judgment right, and the slave control unit displays a holding image (holding icon) corresponding to the held right. The image display means (display/audio control section 140) displays a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change ) an effect execution means (display/audio control unit 140) that executes a notification sound), and the image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing occurs. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) in which the held image is changed to a special held image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game, and the change effect is controlled by the main control means. A first change effect (a winning change effect) executed at a frame update timing in response to reception of a transmitted command indicating that the right has occurred (starting opening winning designation command); A second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination; The effect executing means starts the notification effect at a frame update timing at which the first change effect is started, and executes the notification effect at a frame update timing different from a frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. I'm trying to finish it. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a command from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, a reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of suspending the right of said determination, and a fluctuation control means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying said symbol based on the result of said determination. The slave control means includes an image display means (display/audio control section 140) that displays a reserved image (reserved icon) corresponding to the reserved right on the display means (first image display device 70). ), and a performance execution means (display/sound control unit 140) that causes the performance means (sound output device 9) to execute a predetermined notification performance (icon generation (change) notification sound) during the progress of the game, The image display means is configured to update the image displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached, and the suspended image changes to a special suspended image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect), and the change effect is performed upon reception of a command (a change pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means indicating that the change display of the symbol starts. a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at a corresponding frame update timing, and a predetermined frame update timing after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. and a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at the frame update timing when the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started and ended at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a third configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a command from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. a determination means (main CPU 110a) for performing the determination, a reservation means (main RAM 110c) capable of suspending the right of said determination, and a fluctuation control means for displaying the symbol in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying said symbol based on the result of said determination. (main CPU 110a), and the slave control means displays a pre-judgment pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the pending right, and a pending image (pending icon) corresponding to the pending right; An image display means (display/audio control section 140) that displays a corresponding post-judgment pending image (the icon) on a display means (first image display device 70), and a production means (audio output device 9 ) for executing a predetermined notification effect (icon generation (change) notification sound); It is configured to update an image displayed on the display means, and from the pre-judgment suspended image or the post-judgment suspended image to the pre-judgment special suspended image or post-judgment special suspended image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect), and the change effect is based on a command (variation pattern designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the change display of the symbol starts. A predetermined frame after receiving a first change effect (normal change pattern 01) executed at frame update timing and a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The effect execution means includes a second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01) executed at the update timing, and the effect execution means updates the frame in which the first change effect is started. The notification effect is started at a different frame update timing than the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the post-judgment special is more effective than the case where the notification effect is changed to the pre-judgment special hold image. When the image is changed to a reserved image, the second change effect is executed at a higher rate. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problem, according to the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a command from the main control means In the gaming machine, the main control means determines whether or not to perform a special game (jackpot game) that is advantageous to the player. and a holding unit (main RAM 110c) capable of holding a predetermined number of the judgment rights. The image display means (display/audio control unit 140) displays the icon) on the display means (the first image display device 70), and the display means (the audio output device 9) displays a predetermined notification effect (icon generation) during the progress of the game. (change) notification sound)), and the image display means updates the image displayed on the display means every time a predetermined frame update timing is reached. It is possible to perform a change effect (icon change effect) in which the pending image is changed to a special pending image indicating the possibility of whether or not to play the special game; A first change performance executed at a frame update timing according to a command (starting opening winning designation command, fluctuation pattern designation command, special symbol storage designation command) transmitted from the main control means when the number of the rights held changes. (change effect upon winning, normal change pattern 01) and at a predetermined frame update timing determined in advance after receiving a command (variation pattern designation command) indicating the result of the determination transmitted from the main control means. The display mode of the special reserved image includes the second change effect (normal change pattern 02, character effect change pattern 01, and symbol effect change pattern 01), and the display mode of the special reserved image is the first display mode (blue character icon) a second display mode (red character icon) in which the possibility of playing the special game is higher than that of the first display mode; and ends the notification effect at a frame update timing different from the frame update timing at which the first change effect ends, and the second change effect is executed more than when the first change effect is executed. When the display mode changes to the second display mode in the first change effect, the number of reserved rights is the first number. When the second number is greater than the number 1, there is a higher possibility that the special game will be played. By doing so, it becomes possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, "special reservation images" and "pre-determination special reservation images" are images with a different shape or color from the regular reservation icon, or images with a color around the reservation icon that indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot. Those that display effects, those that display characters around (nearby) the pending icon that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot, and those that display a character image (for example, "SP") that indicates the performance that is scheduled to be performed around (near) the pending icon. ``Pseudo-link'').

In addition, "post-judgment special pending images" are images that have a different shape or color from the normal icon, or images that display a color effect around the icon that indicates the expectation of winning a jackpot. Displaying characters around (near) the icon that indicate the level of expectation of winning a jackpot, and character images (for example, "SP", "pseudo-ren", etc.) that indicate the expected performance around (near) the icon. ).

Furthermore, the "first display mode" includes a special icon (blinking CD icon), a blue character icon, a green character icon, and the like.
Furthermore, the "second display mode" includes a red character icon, a rainbow character icon, and the like.

In addition, "post-judgment pending images" and "post-judgment special pending images" are those that are displayed from the start of the variable effect until the end, those that are displayed only for a predetermined period after the start of the variable effect, and the images that are displayed after the variable effect starts. Specific periods during performance (SP Reach, SPSP Reach, etc.) include times when the display is erased.

<Contents of the invention described in the second embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, judgment information obtained when acquisition conditions are met is stored as a reserved memory, and based on the judgment information, it is judged whether or not to execute a special game advantageous to the player, and the judgment information is processed based on the judgment result. It is common to perform variable effects based on this. Some of these gaming machines display an increase or decrease in the number of pending images corresponding to each pending memory, or display an execution image corresponding to a pending memory in which a variable performance has been executed. There are some that allow players to grasp the progress of the game (for example, see Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1 has a problem in that when the number of pending memories changes, it is difficult to immediately grasp the number of pending memories.

◆ A first configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30ms). The display image is updated every time, and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. 2. The display of the first pending information decreases (to the pending number subtracted by 1) before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the update) is completed is earlier. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆A second configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decrease in the first pending information and displays execution information (the relevant icon), and the frame in which the change display of the second pending information to the execution information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) is completed. The frame update timing at which the reduction display of the first pending information (updating to the pending number subtracted by 1) is completed is earlier than the update timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆ As a third configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30ms). The display image is updated every time, and the information display means is capable of displaying a decrease in the first pending information and a decreasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories decreases. When the number of memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information, and the number of hold memories increases while the second hold information is displayed as a decrease. In this case, even before the frame update timing at which the decreasing display of the second pending information (movement to the center of the adjacent display section in the pending icon display area) is completed, the increasing display of the first pending information (Update to the pending number added by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆As a fourth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30ms). The display image is updated every time, and when the number of pending memories decreases, the information display means displays a decreased display of the first pending information, and displays the second pending information for which the fluctuating display has been started as execution information (the relevant When the number of pending memories increases, it is possible to display an increase in the first pending information and to display an increase in the second pending information. 2. If the number of pending memories increases while displaying a change in pending information, a frame update that completes the reduction display of the second pending information (movement from the pending icon display area to the center of the icon display area) Even before the timing, the display of an increase in the first hold information (updating to a hold number incremented by 1) is started. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆ As a fifth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the reservation memories, and the image display means has a predetermined frame update timing (1/30ms). The display image is updated every time, and the information display means is capable of displaying an increase in the first pending information and an increasing display of the second pending information when the number of pending memories increases, If the number of pending memories increases during execution of the performance, a frame update that completes the display of an increase in the second pending information (enlargement of the pending icon additionally displayed in the pending icon display area to the normal size) The frame update timing at which the increase display of the first reservation information (updating to the reservation number added by 1) is completed is earlier than the timing. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆ As a sixth configuration for solving the above problems, a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , comprising a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player, and a storage means capable of storing the determination information on which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory, The slave control means includes: a variable effect execution means capable of executing a variable effect according to the result of the determination on an image display means (image display device); and first holding information (holding number) indicating the number of holding memories; Information display means capable of displaying second reservation information (reservation icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the suspension memories, and the variable performance execution means displays the special game during execution of the fluctuation performance. It is possible to execute a specific performance (SP reach performance, SPSP reach performance, full rotation reach performance) that makes the execution expected, and when the number of the pending memories increases, the information display means displays an increase in the first pending information. , and displaying an increase in the second pending information, and if the number of pending memories increases during execution of the specific effect, displaying an increase in the first pending information (adding 1 to the pending number). The update) is executed, but the display of the increase in the second pending information is not executed until a predetermined condition is met (the specific effect is completed, the loss effect symbol or the jackpot effect symbol that was displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner). ing. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

◆ A seventh configuration for solving the above problem includes a main control means (main control board 110) that controls the progress of the game, and a slave control means (main control board 110) that controls the performance of the game based on commands from the main control means. In the gaming machine equipped with a performance control board 130), the main control means performs a game based on the determination information (special figure determination information) acquired when the acquisition condition is met (the game ball enters the starting hole). , a determining means capable of determining whether or not to execute a special game (jackpot game) advantageous to the player; a storage means capable of storing the determination information for which the determination has not been performed as a reserved memory; and a normal game state. , a gaming state control means capable of controlling a specific gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state, and the slave control means displays a variable effect according to the result of the determination by means of an image display means (image display means). a variable effect execution means executable on a display device), first suspension information (a suspension number) indicating the number of the suspension memories, and second suspension information (a suspension icon) indicating an identifier corresponding to each of the suspension memories; and an information display means capable of displaying an increase in the first hold information and an increase in the second hold information when the number of hold memories increases. The storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole) as a first pending memory, and the storage means stores the determination information based on the establishment of the first acquisition condition (entering the game ball into the first starting hole), and stores the determination information based on the establishment of the second acquisition condition (the entry of the game ball into the first starting hole), The judgment information based on the game ball entering the mouth) is stored as a second pending memory, and when the number of the first pending memories increases in the specific gaming state, an increase display (1 (Update to the added pending number) is executed, but the display of the increase in the second pending information is not executed until a predetermined condition is met (the last variable performance in the specific gaming state is completed, and the normal gaming state is returned). It looks like this. By doing this, it becomes easier to grasp the number of reserved memories.

<Contents of the invention described in the third embodiment>
In conventional gaming machines, it is determined whether or not to execute a special game that is advantageous to the player based on the determination information obtained when the acquisition condition is met, and the variation effect of the effect symbols is displayed as an image based on the determination result. It is generally executed by a device. In such a gaming machine, there are multiple types of variation patterns for the variation performance of the performance symbols, and based on the determination result, the user selects from among the multiple types of variation patterns and displays the variation performance of the performance symbols in the selected variation pattern as an image. It was displayed on a display device (for example, see Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2017-018225). However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is room for improvement in the aspect of the variation presentation of the presentation symbols, and there is a risk that the game becomes less interesting.

◆ As a first configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuating performance control means is configured to display a fluctuating display mode in which the fluctuating design is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, FIG. 50-2). c), FIG. 52-2(d)), and a second time to execute a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the production symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows. A stop effect can be executed depending on the time, and the stop display mode includes a first state (variable patterns 1A to 1C) in which different effect patterns are displayed in each of the plurality of columns, and There is a second state (fluctuation patterns 2A to 3C) in which at least two of the same performance symbols are stopped and displayed, and in the first state and the second state, the execution time of the first time is In addition, the mode of the predetermined performance (variation end suggestion performance) in the performance pattern during the first time can be controlled to be different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a second configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuating performance control means is configured to display a fluctuating display mode in which the fluctuating design is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, FIG. 50-2). c), Fig. 52-2 (d)) is executed, and during the variable display of the symbols, a common display mode (first time) in which the effect symbols common to two columns among the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed. 1 display mode), and the stop effect can be executed, and the common display mode is when executing the first variation effect (variation patterns 2A to 2C) There is a case where the second variable performance (variation patterns 3A to 3C) with high expectations for the special game to be executed is executed, and a case where the first variable performance is executed and a case where the second variable performance is executed. In this case, the execution time of the first time is different, and the mode of the predetermined performance (variable end suggestion performance) in the performance symbol during the first time can be controlled to be different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◇As a third configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, a symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition, and when the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific pattern, During the fluctuating display of the symbols, the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows, and a recognizable display mode that is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, Fig. 50-2(c), (e), It is possible to execute a stop effect by the first time of executing the steps shown in Figures 52-1 (d), 52-2 (d), and 53 (e)), and a predetermined effect (battle There are cases in which the predetermined effects are executed (effects, revival effects, pseudo-continuous effects) and cases in which the predetermined effects are not executed. It is possible to control so that the execution time of one hour is different and the mode of the predetermined effect (variable end suggestion effect) in the effect pattern during the first time is different. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fourth configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuating performance control means is configured to display a fluctuating display mode in which the fluctuating design is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, FIG. 52-1). d), FIG. 53(e)), and a second time to execute a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the above-mentioned production symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows. A case in which a predetermined effect (pseudo continuous effect, revival effect) is executed in which the recognizable display mode is executed multiple times during one change in the symbol, and a case in which the predetermined effect is not executed. , when executing the predetermined effect, the execution time of the first time is made longer than when the predetermined effect is not executed, and the stop display mode stops at the specific effect symbol. It can be controlled to make it easier to display. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a fifth configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuating performance control means is configured to display a fluctuating display mode in which the fluctuating design is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, FIG. 50-2). c), FIG. 52-2(d)), and a second time to execute a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the production symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows. A stop effect can be executed, and the stop display mode includes a first state (fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the effect symbols that are different in each of the plurality of columns are stopped and displayed, and at least two of the plurality of columns are common. There is a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) in which the effect pattern is stopped and displayed, and the second state has a longer execution time for the first time than the first state, and It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (battle effect, revival effect, pseudo continuous effect) that improves the level of expectation is more likely to be executed before the recognizable display mode is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a sixth configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuating performance control means is configured to display a fluctuating display mode in which the fluctuating design is recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and is swingable (fluctuation end suggestion performance, FIG. 50-2). e), Fig. 52-1 (d), Fig. 53 (e)) are executed for the first time, and a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the production symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows is executed. A stop effect can be executed at a second time, and the stop display mode includes a first state (fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) in which different effect patterns are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and the specific effect. There is a second state (fluctuation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the symbol is stopped and displayed, and in the second state, the execution time of the first time is longer than in the first state, and the recognition is possible. It is possible to perform control so that predetermined effects (battle effects, revival effects, pseudo-continuation effects) that improve the level of expectation are more likely to be executed before the display mode is executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a seventh configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuation performance control means is configured to perform a recognizable display mode (such as a fluctuation end suggestion performance) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and can be oscillated during the fluctuation display of the symbols. The stop effect can be executed for one hour and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There are one state (variation patterns 1A to 1C) and a second state (variation patterns 2A to 3C) different from the first state, and the second state is more recognizable than the first state. It is possible to control so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is easily executed while the display mode is being executed. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As an eighth configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuation performance control means is configured to perform a recognizable display mode (such as a fluctuation end suggestion performance) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and can be oscillated during the fluctuation display of the symbols. The stop effect can be executed for one hour and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There are a first state (fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the production pattern is stopped and displayed that is different from the specific production pattern, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific production pattern is stopped and displayed, Compared to the first state, the second state can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is more likely to be executed during execution of the recognizable display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a ninth configuration of the gaming machine to solve the above problem, when the symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuation performance control means is configured to perform a recognizable display mode (such as a fluctuation end suggestion performance) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and can be oscillated during the fluctuation display of the symbols. The stop effect can be executed for one hour and a second time for executing a stop display mode (second display mode) in which the effect symbols are stopped and displayed in all of the plurality of rows, and the stop display mode is There is a first state (fluctuation patterns 1A to 1C) in which the different production symbols are stopped and displayed in each of the plurality of rows, and a second state (variation patterns 4A to 5C) in which the specific production symbol is stopped and displayed, Compared to the second state, the first state can be controlled so that a predetermined effect (variation end suggestion effect) is less likely to be executed during execution of the recognizable display mode. By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆As a tenth configuration of a gaming machine to solve the above problem, when a symbol (special symbol TZ) is displayed in a variable manner based on the establishment of a starting condition, and the symbol is stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific symbol, the player In a gaming machine capable of executing a special game that is advantageous to , and includes a variable performance control means (performance control board 130) capable of controlling the performance pattern to be stopped and displayed at a predetermined specific performance pattern when the pattern is stopped and displayed at the specific design, The fluctuation performance control means is configured to perform a recognizable display mode (such as a fluctuation end suggestion performance) in which the performance symbols are recognizable in all of the plurality of rows and can be oscillated during the fluctuation display of the symbols. It is possible to perform a stop performance in one hour, and it is possible to control the mode of the predetermined performance (fluctuating end suggestion performance) in the performance pattern during the first time to be different between a high certainty state and a low certainty state. . By doing so, it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

◆[Invention 1]
The gaming machine of invention 1 (gaming machine 1P) includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted, and a storage section (board board) that houses the control board and has light transparency. a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700), a seal part (seal part 1710) attached to the storage part and made of a material having light transmittance; A first information display section (writing area 1570, code section 1712, information display section 1713) for displaying information regarding the control means is provided at a different position from the seal section in the storage section, and is provided at a different position from the seal section in the storage section, and displays information regarding the control means. a second information display section (date mark section 1720) for displaying a date mark section; the first information display section includes a plurality of colored regions (print section 1711, a plurality of area 1575), a first colored area among the plurality of colored areas, and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, The main feature is to have a visible area (peeping part 1574) in which the control board housed in the part can be seen.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 as in invention 1, the opening date written in the writing area 1570 of the seal portion 1720 and the date mark portion 1720 Although the displayed date of manufacture is different information, they have a predetermined chronological relationship. Specifically, the opening date written in writing area 1570 of seal portion 1720 is always newer than the manufacturing date displayed in date mark portion 1720. Therefore, by checking the consistency between the date of opening in the writing area 1570 of the seal part 1720 and the date of manufacture in the date mark part 1720, the inspector can prevent fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. It can be easily confirmed.

◆[Invention 2]
The gaming machine of invention 2 (gaming machine 1P) includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted, and a storage section (board) that houses the control board and has light transparency. a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700), a first seal part (seal part 1710) affixed to the storage part and formed of a light-transmitting material, and a first information display section (code section 1712, information display section 1713) and a second information display section (writing area 1570) for displaying information regarding the control means; and the first seal section in the storage section. a second seal section (tamperproof seal section 1730) affixed at a different position from the second seal section; and a third information display section (code section 1732) provided on the second seal section for displaying information regarding the control means. The first information display section and the third information display section include an identification display in a predetermined manner that can be read by a terminal device, and the second information display section includes an identification display that reduces the light transmittance. between a plurality of colored areas (printing unit 1711, a plurality of areas 1575) that are colored areas, and a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area. The third information display section includes a visible area (peeping section 1574) that is not marked with predetermined characters and allows the control board stored in the storage section to be viewed. In the thickness direction of the storage section, the distance from a virtual plane that extends the control board in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section is the distance from the virtual surface to the first information display section. The gist is that they are set up differently.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1720 and the tamper-proof seal portion 1730 as in invention 2, the information displayed on the code portion 1712 of the seal portion 1720 and the information display portion 1713 is It is linked to the information displayed on the prohibition seal section 1730. Therefore, by checking the consistency between the information on the seal section 1720 and the information on the tamper-proof seal section 1730, the inspector can easily confirm fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board. Further, the code portion 1732 of the tamper-evident seal portion 1730 is such that the distance from the virtual plane in which the control board 1705 is extended in the direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the board case 1700 is from the virtual plane. The seal portion 1720 is provided at a different distance from the code portion 1712 and the information display portion 1713. Therefore, compared to a case where the code part 1732 of the tamper-proof seal part 1730, the code part 1712 of the seal part 1720, and the information display part 1713 are provided at the same height and on the same plane, The information in the code section 1732 of the tamper-proof seal section 1730, the code section 1712 of the seal section 1720, and the information display section 1713 can be easily checked, and fraudulent acts such as unauthorized replacement of the control board can be easily confirmed.

◆[Invention 3]
The gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 3 includes a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control board 501, 1705) and a storage section (board case 1551, 1700) for storing the control board, and the control board (control board 501, 1705). a first information display (characters 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (characters 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means; The gist is that the distance to the first information display is different from the distance from the top surface of the storage section to the second information display.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in invention 3, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display section 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 of the level 1381 and the characters 1372 of the level 1382 are formed at different distances from the top surface of the board case 1700. Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case section 1700, it is easier to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or inner surface of the case section, for example. It's difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at different distances from the top surface in the thickness direction of the board case 1700, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction, so it is not formed on only one layer. This makes it more difficult to remove than if there were. If such an identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the board case 1700, making it difficult for the inspector to discover the fraud. It can be said that this method is easy to implement and can suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping parts and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap when viewed from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P. It is possible to see the characters 1372 together with the characters 1372, and it is also possible to easily check whether or not there is any fraudulent activity on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆[Invention 4]
The gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 4 includes a control means (assembly 2P) having a control board (control board 501, 1705) and a storage section (board case 1551, 1700) for storing the control board, and the control board (control board 501, 1705). a first information display (characters 1371 of the identification display 523) and a second information display (characters 1374 of the identification display 523) provided on the means, and a predetermined surface of the control board in the thickness direction of the control board. The gist is that the distance from to the first information display is different from the distance from the predetermined surface of the control board to the second information display.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 as in invention 4, the characters 1371 and 1372 are in different layers in the thickness direction of the identification display section 1390. Therefore, the characters 1371 of the layer 1381 and the characters 1372 of the layer 1382 are formed on a predetermined surface of the control board 1705 (for example, a virtual image of the control board 1705 stretched in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction). are formed at different distances from the surface). Since such an identification mark 523 is formed inside the member forming the case section 1700, it is easier to remove than when the entire identification mark 523 is formed on the outer surface or inner surface of the case section, for example. It's difficult. In addition, the identification display 523 is provided at different distances from a predetermined surface of the control board 1705, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction. It is relatively difficult to remove. If such an identification mark 523 is removed by fraud, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the board case 1700, making it difficult for the inspector to discover the fraud. It can be said that this method is easy to implement and can suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts. Furthermore, since the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 have no overlapping parts and are separated from each other in a plan view, the characters 1371 and 1372 in the identification display 523 do not overlap when viewed from the back side of the gaming machine with respect to the assembly 2P. It is possible to see the characters 1372 together with the characters 1372, and it is also possible to easily check whether or not there is any fraudulent activity on the control board 1705 or the like.

◆[Invention 5]
A gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 5 includes a control board (control board 501, 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling a game are mounted, and a control board that allows the plurality of electronic components to be visually recognized. A storage section (board case 1551, 1700) that is housed and has optical transparency, and a first information display section (code section 1572, 1712, information display section 1573, 1713) that is attached to the storage section and displays predetermined information. ) and a second information display section (description area 1570), the first information display section is displayed in a first mode including specific information and a second mode different from the first mode, The second information display section is formed of a material having light transmittance, and includes a plurality of colored regions (printed sections 1571, 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and The present invention further includes a region (peep section 1574) between a first colored region of the colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, where the control board can be visually recognized. shall be.

In the case of a gaming machine 1P including an assembly 2P having a seal portion 1720 as in invention 5, the QR code (registered trademark) of the code portion 1712 and the character string of the information display portion 1713 are linked to each other as shown in FIG. At the same time, information containing the same specific information is displayed in different ways. Therefore, it is difficult to commit fraud against the code section 1712, and even if the information in the information display section 1713 has been tampered with, the inspector can easily determine whether or not there is any fraudulent activity by checking the consistency with the code section 1712. It is possible to check the actual situation and also to deter fraudulent acts. Furthermore, in the seal portion 1720, a peeking portion 1574 is formed between the code portion 1712 and information display portion 1713 and the writing area 1570, so that unauthorized access to the control board 1705 can be made in the same way as described above. Since it can be easily confirmed whether or not fraud has been committed, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced.

◆[Invention 6]
The game machine (1) of invention 6 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first light-transmitting case portion (1803) containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a sealing part (1560) provided in the case part and made of a light-transmitting material;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) are printed on the seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the seal part,
The seal portion is
having a second light transmittance that is lower than the first light transmittance and that allows the electronic component to be seen;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. The main feature is to include a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed through the second light transmittance.

Since the viewing section is provided, the inspector can check the electronic component through the viewing section. Therefore, compared to the case where no viewing section is provided, it is possible to more easily confirm whether or not tampering has been carried out with respect to the electronic component. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved. Furthermore, since a plurality of colored areas are provided, it is possible to write, for example, the name of the inspector and the date when the board case was opened. The inspector can also write in the area the date on which it was confirmed whether or not the control board was tampered with. Furthermore, since the viewing portion is provided between the regions, the regions are more conspicuous than when only the regions are provided. Therefore, it becomes easier for the inspector to confirm the characters written in the area. Therefore, the possibility of fraud being committed can be reduced, allowing players to play with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved. Furthermore, since the light transmittance of the seal part is lower than that of the case part, it becomes difficult to forge the seal part, making it difficult to commit fraud such as replacing the whole case part with an unauthorized board. This allows the player to play the game with peace of mind. Therefore, the player's interest is improved.

◆[Invention 7-1]
The game machine (1) of invention 7-1 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a sealing part (1560) provided on the first surface of the case part and made of a material having optical transparency;
a position display part (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the case part and serving as a mark of the position where the seal part is attached;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) are printed on the seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the seal part,
The seal portion is
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. The gist thereof is to have a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification along the position indicator. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

Furthermore, since the position display section is formed on the inner surface and the seal section is attached to the outer surface, no matter where the seal section is attached, the position display section will not interfere with the seal section, so the attachment will not be hindered. If a portion of the sticker peels off, the inspector must confirm whether it was caused by fraud, which adds time to the inspection. However, with such a position display section, the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the board case. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 7-2]
Further, the gaming machine of invention 7-2 includes a board (501) for controlling the game,
a case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a sealing part (1560) provided on the first surface of the case part and made of a material having optical transparency;
a position indicating portion (541), which is a convex portion and/or a concave portion formed on the outer edge of the seal portion on the first surface of the case portion, and serves as a mark of a position where the seal portion is attached;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) are printed on the seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the seal part,
The seal portion is
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. The gist thereof is to have a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

In this case, the manufacturer can position the identification along the position indicator. Therefore, when mass producing gaming machines, the manufacturer can attach an identification display to the same position among a plurality of gaming machines. Since the identification display is attached to the same position among the plurality of gaming machines, the inspector can easily confirm the identification display. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

In addition, since the outer surface to which the seal part is attached is provided with a position display part that is a convex part and/or a concave part formed on the outer edge of the seal part, for example, when the board case is touched, Peeling of the seal can be prevented compared to the case where the seal part is attached to the flat surface of the seal. If a portion of the sticker peels off, the inspector must confirm whether it was caused by fraud, which adds time to the inspection. However, with such a position display section, the seal section is protected, so the inspector can easily confirm the identification mark attached to the board case. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 8]
The game machine (1) of invention 8 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a first optically transparent storage section (1803) that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
formed of a second light transmittance that has a lower light transmittance than the first light transmittance and that allows the electronic component to be seen;
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are regions with lower light transmittance than the second light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is stored in the storage section. The present invention further includes a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed through the second light transmittance.

In this case, the inspector can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity has been committed by checking the storage means and the storage unit on which the same identification display is displayed. Furthermore, even if the storage means is replaced with another storage means due to fraudulent activity, the examiner can still , it is easy to confirm that fraud has occurred. Therefore, the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 9-1]
The game machine (1) of invention 9-1 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage section (1803) with optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
a position display part (541) formed at a predetermined position located on the back side of the first surface of the storage part and serving as a mark of the position where the second information identification part is attached;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and have reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is stored in the storage section. The main feature is that the electronic device has a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆[Invention 9-2]
The game machine (1) of invention 9-2 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage section (1803) with optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided on the first surface of the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1598) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
A position display portion (541 ) and,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area to which a predetermined character is not attached, and is stored in the storage section. The main feature is that the electronic device has a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆[Invention 10]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 10 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
A first seal part (1561) and a second seal part (1560) are provided in the case part and are made of a light-transmitting material,
The second seal portion is
is formed with a predetermined light transmittance that is lower in light transmittance than the first seal portion and allows the electronic component to be visually recognized;
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions whose light transmittance is lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed through the predetermined light transmittance;
The main point is that it has the following.

According to the present invention, since the light transmittance of the second seal part is lower than the light transmittance of the first seal part, it becomes difficult to forge the second seal part, and fraud such as replacing the entire case part with an unauthorized board becomes difficult. The act can be difficult. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 11]
The game machine (1) of invention 11 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage section (1803) with optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) that are provided in the storage section, are made of a light-transmissive material, and display specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
is formed with a predetermined light transmittance that is lower in light transmittance than the first information identification section and that allows the electronic component to be visually recognized;
a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions whose light transmittance is lower than the predetermined light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is stored in the storage section. a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed through the predetermined light transmittance;
The main point is that it has the following.

◆[Invention 12]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 12 includes a control unit including a board (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the board (501), and a plurality of members (511) including the control unit. a case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) including the electronic component (502, The member (45P) constituting the mounting surface side of the board (595) has an identification mark (523) related to the identification mark (521, 522) attached to the control section in the thickness direction of the board (501). The gist is that the first display (1371) and the second display (1372) are attached at different distances from the substrate (501).

In this case, the identification display on the board and the identification display on the case are related, so if the board is illegally replaced, the identification display on the board and the identification display on the case may become different. , it becomes easier for inspectors to detect fraudulent activities. In addition, the identification mark is provided at different distances from the board in the thickness direction of the board, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction, so that the identification mark is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. If this kind of identification mark is removed by unauthorized persons, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the case, which could lead to fraud by the inspector. This makes it easy to discover fraud and prevents fraud from occurring. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 13]
The game machine (1) of invention 13 includes a control unit including a board (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the mounting surface of the board (501), and a plurality of members ( 511) and a case portion (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551), the substrate (501) as an identification mark (520) attached to the control means and associated with each other; has a first indication (1371) and a second indication (1372) attached such that the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is different, and the distance from the mounting surface in the thickness direction of the substrate (501) is , has a third display (1375) attached to be the same as the second display (1372).

In this case, since the identification marks of the control means are related to each other, if the board is fraudulently replaced, the board identification mark and the case part identification mark may become different, and the inspector may be found to have committed fraud. Acts can be easily detected. In addition, the identification mark is provided at different distances from the board in the thickness direction of the board, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction, so that the identification mark is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. If this kind of identification mark is removed by unauthorized persons, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the case, which could lead to fraud by the inspector. This makes it easy to discover fraud and prevents fraud from occurring. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 14]
A gaming machine (1) of invention 14 includes a control section including a board (501) and electronic components (502, 595) provided on the board (501), and a plurality of members (511) containing the control section. A case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) containing an identification mark (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) attached to the control part. 521, 522), a first indication (1371) and a second indication (1372) are attached at different positions in the thickness direction of the substrate (501), and The control unit includes a position in the thickness direction of the substrate as the identification mark (520) related to the identification mark (523) attached to the case part (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551). The gist is that the third and fourth indications are given differently.

In this case, the identification display on the board and the identification display on the case are related, so if the board is illegally replaced, the identification display on the board and the identification display on the case may become different. , it becomes easier for inspectors to detect fraudulent activities. In addition, the identification mark is provided at different distances from the board in the thickness direction of the board, that is, it is divided into multiple layers in the thickness direction, so that the identification mark is formed only on one layer. It can be made more difficult to remove. If this kind of identification mark is removed by unauthorized persons, it will be polished or scraped and cause noticeable damage to the case, which could lead to fraud by the inspector. This makes it easy to discover fraud and prevents fraud from occurring. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 15]
A gaming machine (1) according to invention 15 includes: a control board (501) for controlling the game; a storage means (502) provided on the control board (501) for storing memory contents used for controlling the game; A plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the control board (501) and different from the storage means (502), and the storage means (502) and the plurality of electronic components (595) are visible and difficult to contact. A light-transmissive storage section (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) is provided in the storage section (3P, 1003, 1103, 1203, 1303, 1551) to display specific information. a first information identification section (523, 1561) and a second information identification section (1560) for displaying specific information; and a third information identification section (522, 1562) provided in the storage means (502) for displaying specific information. ), the control board (502) includes a first region (1900a) and a second region (1900b) having a different aspect from the first region (1900a), and the second region (1900b) is provided with a fourth information identification section (1902) for displaying specific information, and the first information identification section (523, 1561) and the third information identification section (522, 1562) are at least the same. The display includes an identification display (529, 1595, 1596), the first information identification section is displayed at an angle that allows the attachment point of the storage means to be visually recognized, and the second information identification section is displayed including an identification display (529, 1595, 1596). a plurality of colored regions (1575), which are regions that are formed of a material having a color and have reduced light transmittance; a first colored region (1575) among the plurality of colored regions; and a first colored region (1575) of the plurality of colored regions; A viewing portion (1574) that is a portion with no predetermined characters attached between it and a second colored region (1575) that is different from the region, and is used to look into the plurality of electronic components stored in the storage portion. The gist is to have the following.

In this case, since at least the same identification display is attached to the first information identification section of the storage section and the third information identification section of the storage means, the inspector can identify the storage section and the storage section on which the same identification display is displayed. You can easily confirm that no fraudulent activity is taking place. In addition, since the first information identification part is attached at an angle that allows the attachment point of the storage means to be visually recognized, for example, even if the storage means is replaced due to fraudulent activity, the first information identification part is attached to the storage means and the storage part. By determining whether the identification displays are the same, the inspector can easily confirm that fraudulent activity has occurred. Furthermore, since the second information identification section of the storage section is provided with a viewing section, the inspector can visually check the plurality of electronic components included in the storage section through the viewing section, and It is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been committed against electronic components. Therefore, compared to gaming machines that do not have a viewing section, inspectors can easily confirm whether or not tampering has been carried out on the multiple electronic components contained in the storage section. This can lead to a reduction in the possibility of fraud being committed. In such a second information identification section, predetermined characters can be written in a plurality of colored areas, so that there is no colored area that reduces light transmittance, and the predetermined characters can be written in a transparent part. It is easier for the inspector to confirm the content of text information than written information. Furthermore, in such a second information identification section, since the transparent viewing section is provided between a plurality of colored regions, compared to a structure in which only a plurality of colored regions are arranged side by side, The colored area stands out, making it easier for the inspector to confirm the characters written in the colored area. In this way, it is easy for the inspector to discover fraudulent acts, and the occurrence of fraudulent acts can be suppressed. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 16]
The gaming machine of invention 16 (gaming machine 1P) includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted, and a storage part (board a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700), and a seal portion (seal portion 1710) affixed to the storage portion and formed of a light-transmitting material, the seal portion comprising: A plurality of colored regions (printed portion 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), which are regions with reduced light transmittance, and a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region. A visible area (peeping part 1574) which is a part where predetermined characters are not attached between the colored area and the control board stored in the storage part, The means is mounted such that some electronic components (electronic components 798) among the plurality of electronic components on the control board are visible through the visible area, and the some electronic components are The gist is that at least one electronic component (information display 1750) among different electronic components is mounted so that it can be visually recognized without going through the visible area.

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the sixteenth aspect, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without using the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, since some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be viewed without using the viewing section 1574 are more visible on the control board 1705 than electronic components that can be viewed through the viewing section 1574. Possible fraudulent acts against some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy viewing by opening the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P, it is required to have the above-mentioned effects.

◆[Invention 17]
The gaming machine (gaming machine 1P) of invention 17 includes a control board (control board 1705) on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted, and a storage section (board board) that houses the control board and has optical transparency. a control means (assembly 2P) having a case 1700), a seal section (seal section 1710) affixed to the storage section and formed of a light-transmitting material; a predetermined information display section (information display device 1750) that displays predetermined value information regarding the seal section, and the seal section includes a plurality of colored regions (print section 1711, a plurality of regions 1575), a first colored region among the plurality of colored regions and a second colored region different from the first colored region, to which a predetermined character is not attached; a visible area (peeping section 1574) that allows the control board housed in the storage section to be viewed; (electronic component 798) is mounted so as to be visible through the visible area, and the predetermined information display section is mounted so as to be visible without going through the visible area. .

According to the gaming machine 1P including the assembly 2P having the seal portion 1710 and the information display 1750 as in the seventeenth aspect, some electronic components such as the information display 1750 can be visually recognized without using the viewing portion 1574. It is possible. Therefore, since some electronic components that require immediate and easy visual recognition are easy to visually recognize, it is easy to confirm fraudulent activity. In addition, some electronic components that can be viewed without using the viewing section 1574 are more visible on the control board 1705 than electronic components that can be viewed through the viewing section 1574. Possible fraudulent acts against some electronic components can be deterred. In particular, since the information display 1750 is a member that requires easy viewing by opening the game board unit 12P of the game machine 1P, it is required to have the above-mentioned effects.

◆[Invention 18]
The game machine (1) of invention 18 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a control means having;
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means;
a seal portion (1560) provided on the control means and formed of a material having optical transparency;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) are printed on the seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the seal part,
The first display and the second display are:
The distances from the surface of the board on which the storage means is mounted to the display of the first and second displays are different,
The seal portion is
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. The gist thereof is to have a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

In this case, the first display and the second display are provided at predetermined locations on the control means, and the distances from the storage means mounting surface of the board to the display of the first and second display are different, so that counterfeiting of the control means is prevented. This makes it possible to suppress the occurrence of fraudulent acts in which the entire control means is replaced with a fraudulent infrastructure. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

The control means includes a board, a case part, a storage means, and an electronic component. Therefore, for example, the first display may be provided on the substrate and the second display may be provided on the case.

◆[Invention 19]
The game machine (1) of invention 19 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a case portion (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a control means having;
a seal portion (1560) provided on the control means and formed of a material having optical transparency;
A plurality of colored areas (1575) are printed on the seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the seal part,
Displaying first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided on the storage means at different predetermined locations of the control means, and on the side of the board on which the storage means is mounted. The distances from the surface to where the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The seal portion is
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is included in the case portion. The gist thereof is to have a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

◆[Invention 20]
The game machine (1) of invention 20 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a light-transmissive storage section (1803) that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a control means having;
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
The first display and the second display are:
Distances from the side of the board on which the storage means is mounted to where the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) that are formed of a material having light transmittance and have reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and is stored in the storage section. a viewing section (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed;
The gist is to have the following.

◆[Invention 21]
The game machine (1) of invention 21 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage section (1803) with optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a control means having;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
First and second displays (1371, 1372) associated with the third information identification section are displayed at different predetermined locations of the control means, and the first and second displays (1371, 1372) associated with the third information identification section are displayed at different predetermined locations of the control means, and , the distance until the two displays are displayed is different,
The second information identification section includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area to which a predetermined character is not attached, and is stored in the storage section. a viewing section (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed;
The gist is to have the following.

◆[Invention 22]
The game machine (1) of invention 22 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the storage means;
a storage section (1803) with optical transparency that stores the storage means and the plurality of electronic components in a visible and difficult-to-reach manner;
a first information identification section (1561, 1595) and a second information identification section (1560, 1572, 1573) provided in the storage section and displaying specific information;
a third information identification section (1562, 1596) provided in the storage means and displaying specific information;
The first information identification unit and the third information identification unit are
be displayed with at least an identification signifying the same content;
The second information identification section includes:
Displayed so that the attachment point of the storage means has a visible angle,
The second information identification section includes:
A plurality of colored regions (1575) which are formed of a material having light transmittance and are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area to which a predetermined character is not attached, and is stored in the storage section. The main feature is that the electronic device has a viewing portion (1574) through which the electronic component can be viewed.

In this case, since the mounting location of the storage means can be reliably visually recognized, it is possible to prevent unauthorized access to the control board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 23]
The game machine (1) of invention 23 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a first seal part (1560) provided in the first case part and made of a material having light transmittance;
a plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas in which light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
a prize ball board (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the board;
a second case part (1813) having optical transparency and containing the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board and storing data used for the prize ball;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the prize ball board and different from the second storage means;
a second seal part (1816) provided in the second case part and made of a light-transmitting material;
A plurality of second colored areas (1817) are printed on the second seal part and are areas in which light transmittance in the second seal part is reduced,
The first seal portion is
A portion between the first colored area and a third colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and looking into the electronic component included in the first case part. has a first peep part (1574) capable of
The second seal portion is
A portion between the second colored area and a fourth colored area different from the second colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and the electronic component contained in the second case part is looked into. It has a second peeking part (1819) that can
The first seal part and the second seal part are
The gist of the present invention is that the electronic components have a light transmittance that allows them to be seen through, and that the light transmittances of the electronic components are different.

In this case, since the light transmittance of the first seal part related to the control board and the second seal part related to the award ball board is different, it is difficult to forge the first and second seal parts, and the case part and the other illegal board This makes it difficult to cheat by swapping with other people. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 24]
The game machine (1) of invention 24 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and mounted through holes on the substrate;
an effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
a second case part (1823) having optical transparency and containing the effect board;
a second storage means (1822) provided on the performance board and storing data used for the performance;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board, different from the second storage means, and surface-mounted on the board;
The seal part (1560) is made of a light-transmitting material,
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area, where a predetermined character is not attached, and which contains the electronic component. A peeking part (1574) that allows you to look into the
and is attached to the first case part without being attached to the second case part.

In this case, since the seals are treated differently between the first case part of the control board and the second case part of the effect board, it is difficult to counterfeit the first and second case parts and the seal part, and each case part is fraudulently tampered with. This can make it difficult to commit fraud by replacing the board. Therefore, the player can play the game with peace of mind, and the player's interest is increased.

◆[Invention 25]
The gaming machine (1) of invention 25 includes a board (501) for controlling the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a control means having;
a prize ball board (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the board;
a second case part (1813) having optical transparency and containing the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board and storing data used for the prize ball;
A prize ball means provided on the prize ball board and having a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the second storage means;
a first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means;
a first seal part (1560) provided in the first case part and made of a material having light transmittance;
a plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas in which light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
a second seal part (1816) provided in the second case part and made of a light-transmitting material;
A plurality of second colored areas (1817) are printed on the second seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the second seal part,
The first display and the second display are:
Distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to where the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The first seal portion is
A portion between the first colored area and a third colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and looking into the electronic component contained in the first case part. has a first peep part (1574) capable of
The second seal part is
A portion between the second colored area and a fourth colored area different from the second colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and the electronic component contained in the second case part is looked into. It has a second peeking part (1819) that can
The first seal part and the second seal part are
The gist of the present invention is that the electronic components have a light transmittance that allows them to be seen through, and that the light transmittances of the electronic components are different.

◆[Invention 26]
The game machine (1) of invention 26 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate and different from the first storage means;
a control means having;
a prize ball board (1811) capable of bidirectional communication with the board;
a second case part (1813) having optical transparency and containing the prize ball substrate;
a second storage means (1812) provided on the prize ball board and storing data used for the prize ball;
A prize ball means provided on the prize ball board and having a plurality of electronic components (595) different from the second storage means;
a first seal part (1560) provided in the first case part and made of a material having light transmittance;
a plurality of first colored areas (1575) that are printed on the first seal part and are areas in which light transmittance in the first seal part is reduced;
a second seal part (1816) provided in the second case part and made of a light-transmitting material;
A plurality of second colored areas (1817) are printed on the second seal part and are areas with reduced light transmittance in the second seal part,
First and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided on the first storage means are displayed at different predetermined locations in the control means, and the storage means of the board is mounted. The distances from the side surface to which the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The first seal portion is
A portion between the first colored area and a third colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and looking into the electronic component included in the first case part. has a first peep part (1574) capable of
The second seal portion is
A portion between the second colored area and a fourth colored area different from the second colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and the electronic component contained in the second case part is looked into. It has a second peeking part (1819) that can
The first seal part and the second seal part are
The gist of the present invention is that the electronic components have a light transmittance that allows them to be seen through, and that the light transmittances of the electronic components are different.

◆[Invention 27]
The game machine (1) of invention 27 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing data used in the game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and mounted through holes on the substrate;
a control means having;
an effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
a second case part (1823) having optical transparency and containing the effect board;
a second storage means (1822) provided on the performance board and storing data used for the performance;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board, different from the second storage means, and surface-mounted on the effect board;
A production means having;
A first display (1371) and a second display (1372) provided at different predetermined locations of the control means,
The first display and the second display are:
Distances from the surface of the substrate on which the first storage means is mounted to where the first and second displays are displayed are different,
The seal part (1560) is made of a light-transmitting material,
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and which contains the electronic component. A peeking part (1574) that allows you to look into the
and is attached to the first case part without being attached to the second case part.

◆[Invention 28]
The game machine (1) of invention 28 includes a board (501) that controls the game;
a first case part (1803) having optical transparency and containing the substrate;
a first storage means (502) provided on the board and storing a memory used in a game;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the substrate, different from the first storage means, and mounted through holes on the substrate;
a control means having;
an effect board (1821) capable of one-way communication with the board;
a second case part (1823) having optical transparency and containing the effect board;
a second storage means (1822) provided on the production board and storing a memory used for production;
a plurality of electronic components (595) provided on the effect board, different from the second storage means, and surface-mounted on the board;
A presentation means having;
displaying first and second displays (1371, 1372) related to the identification display (1562) provided on the first storage means at different predetermined locations in the control means; The distance from the mounting side to the display of the first and second displays is different,
The seal part (1560) is made of a light-transmitting material,
a plurality of colored regions (1575) that are regions with reduced light transmittance;
A portion between a first colored area of the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area where predetermined characters are not attached, and which contains the electronic component. A peeking part (1574) that allows you to look into the
and is attached to the first case part without being attached to the second case part.

Note that the gaming machine 1 of this embodiment is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, but can also be used for a reel-type gaming machine (so-called slot machine). Furthermore, it can also be used in a jankyu game machine or an arranged ball game machine.

Furthermore, although the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is configured to shift to a high probability gaming state a predetermined number of times after all jackpot games are completed, the game ball passes through a specific area in a specific round of jackpot games. In this case, the gaming machine may be configured to shift to a high probability gaming state for a predetermined number of times after the end of the jackpot game.

In addition, after all the jackpot games are finished, the game is moved to a high probability game state, and if the player wins the falling lottery that is executed at the start of the special symbol fluctuation display in the high probability game state, the high probability game state is ended and the normal It is also possible to use a gaming machine that returns to a gaming state.

In addition, if the type of jackpot special symbol is a normal symbol, it will be shifted to a low probability gaming state after the end of the jackpot game, and if the type of the jackpot special symbol is a specific symbol, the next time will be changed after the end of the jackpot game. It may be a gaming machine that shifts to a high probability gaming state that continues until a jackpot game.

Furthermore, in the gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are not executed simultaneously (in parallel), and the variable display of the second special symbol takes priority. Although it is assumed that the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are executed at the same time (in parallel), a gaming machine may be used.

Further, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative in all respects and should be considered not to be restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims rather than the above description, and it is intended that equivalent meanings to the claims and all changes within the scope be included.

1... Gaming machine, 70... First image display device (display means), 70a, 5470a... Production pattern (production pattern), 130... Production control board (variable production control means), TZ... Special symbol (design).

Claims (1)

A game control means constituted by a main control board on which a plurality of electronic components for controlling the game are mounted, and a transparent storage section that houses the main control board;
an information display provided on the main control board and capable of displaying predetermined information regarding the executed game;
A first display and a second display provided at different predetermined locations among the game control means,
a first information identification section and a second information identification section provided in the storage section and having transparency;
a first information display section and a second information display section provided in the first information identification section and for displaying information regarding the game control means;
a third information identification section provided in the storage section and different from both the first information identification section and the second information identification section ;
The first information identification section includes:
arranged so as to overlap at least a portion of the plurality of electronic components contained in the storage section, and
The main coloring area, which has a plurality of colored areas, and which is stored in the storage part in an area between a first colored area among the plurality of colored areas and a second colored area different from the first colored area. The electronic components of the control board are visible,
The third information identification section includes:
It has first predetermined information including code information and second predetermined information including character information,
The first predetermined information can be checked for consistency with the information indicated by the first information display section,
The information display device includes:
provided at a position that is visible from the outside of the storage unit and whose visibility is not obstructed by the first information identification section and the second information identification section;
It is possible to display multiple different information with multiple independently displayable display sections,
The first display and the second display are:
Displays that are associated with each other and are provided at different distances from a predetermined surface of the game control means,
The distance from the virtual surface extending in a direction perpendicular to the thickness direction of the storage section to the first predetermined information is different from the distance from the virtual surface to the first information display section. A gaming machine characterized by: